GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia … · GMC...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011

2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-3Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-45Universal Remote System . . . . 5-53

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-38Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-17Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-31Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-36Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-56

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual M

Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-16Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC,the GMC Truck Emblem, ACADIA,and DENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchaseor due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCwherever it appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20759681 A First Printing ©2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, referto the Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9

Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Sensing System forPassenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-18Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Storage Compartments . . . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑12.

B. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 .

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑12.

D. Head-Up Display (HUD) onpage 5‑32 (If Equipped).

E. Solar Sensor. See DualAutomatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4.

F. AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7 .Navigation/Radio System(If Equipped). See NavigationSystem manual.

G. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 .

H. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

I. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5 .

J. Data Link Connector (DLC).See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑18.

K. Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

L. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2 .

M. Horn on page 5‑4.

N. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 .

O. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑25 or DriverInformation Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑29.

P. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4.

Q. Console Shift Lever(If Equipped). See “ConsoleShift Lever” under Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑21.

R. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑4 .

S. Cupholders on page 4‑1.

T. Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

U. Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑6 .

V. Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 (If Equipped).

W. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16(If Equipped).

X. Glove Box on page 4‑1.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 feet) awayfrom the vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within five secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

To open or close the liftgate, pressand hold& until the liftgatebegins to move.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold for more thantwo seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle Start

Starting the Vehicle

With this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked andthe climate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parkinglamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑6 .

Door LocksTo lock or unlock a door manually:. From the inside use the door

lock knob on the window sill.. From the outside turn the

key toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle, or press the Q or Kbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Power Door Locks

On vehicles with power door locks,the controls are located on the frontdoors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑8 .

LiftgateTo open the liftgate the vehicle mustbe in P (Park). Press the touchpadunder the liftgate handle. To closethe liftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.


1-6 In Brief

Power Liftgate

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the vehicle must be in P (Park) tooperate it.. Press and hold the liftgate

button& on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touchpad switch onthe outside liftgate handle.

For more information see Liftgate onpage 2‑10.

Windows

On vehicles with power windows,the switches are on the doors.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see PowerWindows on page 2‑20.

Seat Adjustment

Manual Seats

1. Pull the handle under the seat tounlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.

See Seat Adjustment on page 3‑3for more information.


In Brief 1-7

Power Seats

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control

B. Reclining Seatbacks

C. Lumbar Adjustment

Move the seat forward or rearwardby moving the control (A) forward orrearward.

Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (A) up or down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 .

To raise or recline the seatback, tiltthe top of the control (B) forward orrearward.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

Press the front or rear of thecontrol (C) to increase or decreaselumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 .

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seatand outside mirrors.


1-8 In Brief

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outsidemirrors.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑17 for more information.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall the memory positions,press and release “1” or “2.”The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seatand outside mirrors will move to theposition previously stored for theidentified driver.

See “Memory Seat and Mirrors”under Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit driver seat featurecan move the seat rearward to allowextra room to exit the vehicle.

S : Press to recall the easy exitseat position. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

See “Memory Seat and Mirrors”under Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 and VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

Second Row Seats

The second row seat can be foldedto access the third row. Pull thesliding seat lever forward, the seatcushion folds, and the seat slidesforward.

See Rear Seats on page 3‑11.


In Brief 1-9

Third Row SeatsThe third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.

Pull up on the release lever locatedon the back of the seat and pushthe seatback forward.

See Third Row Seats on page 3‑13.

Heated Seats

Heated Front Seats

On vehicles with this feature, theheated seat controls are locatedon the center console. The enginemust be running to operate them.

I : Press to turn on the heatedseatback.

J : Press to turn on or off theheated seat and seatback.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9 .

Heated and VentilatedSeatsOn vehicles with this feature, thecontrols are on the center console.

H : Press to ventilate.

J : Press to heat.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑10.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.


1-10 In Brief

Safety Belt

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑16.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑19.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑25.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑56.

Sensing System forPassenger Airbag

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certain

conditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicleis started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑41 for moreinformation.


In Brief 1-11

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver door.

To adjust each mirror:

1. Press (A) or (B) to select themirror.

2. Press on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors


1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

For vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

Interior Mirror

The automatic dimming rearviewmirror reduces the glare from othervehicles headlamps. Each time thevehicle is started, the dimmingfeature comes on.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑19.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


1-12 In Brief

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

To manually turn them on, turn theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise to the farthest position.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again tothe extended position so the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading Lamps

Press the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

For more information, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑5.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑5.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel, to the leftof the steering wheel.


In Brief 1-13

O : Turns the automatic lightcontrol on or off.

AUTO : Automatic operation of theheadlamps at normal brightness andother exterior lamps.

; : Manual operation of theparking lamps and other exteriorlamps.

2 : Manual operation of theheadlamps and other exteriorlamps.

# : Use to turn on or off the foglamps (if equipped).

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1 .. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/

Automatic Headlamp System onpage 6‑3 .

. Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 : Use for a single wiping cycle.

9 : Turns the wipers off.

6 : Delays wiping cycle. Turn theband up for more frequent wipes ordown for less frequent wipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Windshield Washer

J : Press the button at the endof the turn signal/lane change leverto spray washer fluid on thewindshield.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spray washerfluid on the rear window. Thewindow wiper will also come on.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑6.


1-14 In Brief

Climate Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Temperature Control

C. Air Delivery Mode Control

D. Air Conditioning

E. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

F. Air Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger


In Brief 1-15

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Dual AutomaticClimate Control System onpage 8‑4 (If Equipped). For moreinformation about the rear climatecontrol, see Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)on page 8‑10 or Rear ClimateControl System (Rear Climate withRear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

Transmission

Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choosethe top-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving down hill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Whenusing the ERS Mode a number willdisplay next to the L, indicating thecurrent gear that has been selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑27.


1-16 In Brief

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port

O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

f : Select radio stations.

© ¨ : Seek or scan stations.

4 : Change the display betweenthe radio station frequency and thetime, if equipped. While the ignitionis off, press 4 to display the time.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑2.

For vehicles with a Rear SeatEntertainment System (RSE) andRear Seat Audio System (RSA),see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑38 and RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7‑47 for more information.

Storing a Favorite Station

A maximum of 36 stations can bestored as favorites using the sixsoftkeys located below the radiostation frequency tabs and by usingthe radio FAV button. Press FAVto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page.


In Brief 1-17

Each page of favorites can containany combination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑7.

Setting the Clock

To set the time and date for theradio with CD, DVD, and USB Port:

1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, thenpressO, to turn the radio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase or decrease the timeor date, turn f clockwise orcounter‐clockwise.

For detailed instructions on settingthe clock for the vehicles specificaudio system, see Clock onpage 5‑8 .

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑8.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle may have an auxiliaryinput located on the radio faceplateand a USB port located in the centerconsole. External devices suchas iPod®, laptop computers, MP3players, CD changers, USB storagedevice, etc. can be connected tothe auxiliary port using a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) input jack or the USB portdepending on the audio system.

See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑37.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth® system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle’s audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth on page 7‑49.


1-18 In Brief

Steering Wheel Controls

w /x : Press to change favoriteradio stations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or to navigate tracks orfolders on an iPod® or USB device.

b g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems.

+ e − e : Increases or decreasesvolume.

c : Press to reject an incomingcall, or to end a call.

SRCE : Press to switch betweenthe radio, CD, and for vehicleswith, DVD, front auxiliary, and rearauxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod® or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

T : Press to turn cruise controlon and off. The indicator comes onwhen cruise control is on.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previouslyset speed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET– : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.


In Brief 1-19

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑34.

Navigation SystemFor vehicles with this feature,the vehicle's navigation systemprovides detailed maps ofmost major freeways and roadsthroughout the United Statesand Canada. After a destinationhas been set, the system providesturn-by-turn instructions for reachingthe destination. In addition, thesystem can help locate a varietyof points of interest (POI), suchas banks, airports, restaurants,and more.

See the vehicle's Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Storage Compartments

For vehicles with a secondrow center console, press thebuttons (B) or (C) to accessstorage areas.

Lift up on (A) for additionalstorage area.

See Floor Console Storage onpage 4‑2 .

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12‐voltaccessory power outlets whichcan be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phoneor MP3 player.

The power outlets are located:. On the instrument panel below

the climate controls.. At the rear of the center floor

console.. In the rear cargo area.

To use the outlets, remove thecover.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.


1-20 In Brief

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY to operatethe sunroof and power sunshade.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19.

The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.

Vent: Press the front or rear of theswitch to vent or close the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, pressand release the rear or front ofthe switch to express-open orexpress-close the sunroof.

For more information see Sunroofon page 2‑22.

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe traction control system limitswheel spin and the StabiliTraksystem assists with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions. Both systemsturn on automatically every timethe vehicle is started.. To turn off the traction control

part of StabiliTrak, press andrelease 5 located on theinstrument panel and theappropriate DIC messageis displayed. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑36.

. The StabiliTrak systemremains on.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑31.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the lowtire pressure warning light mayappear when the vehicle isfirst started and then turn off.


In Brief 1-21

This may be an early indicator thatthe tire pressures are getting lowand the tires need to be inflated tothe proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑47.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. The kit can be usedto seal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑64 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a jack andspare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑62.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. If the vehicle has DriverInformation Center (DIC)buttons: Press the vehicleinformation button until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: The vehicle must be inP (Park) to access this display.Press the trip odometer resetstem until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays.

3. If the vehicle has DriverInformation Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold theset/reset button until “100%” isdisplayed. Three chimes soundand the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

If the vehicle does not haveDriver Information Center (DIC)buttons: Press and hold thetrip odometer reset stem untilOIL LIFE REMAINING shows“100%.” Three chimes soundand the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message goes off.

4. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.


1-22 In Brief

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-GMC-8782(1‐800‐462-8782)

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0801

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.This program provides technicallytrained advisors who are available24 hours a day, 365 days a year,to give minor repair information ormake towing arrangements.

For more information see RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑8.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(United States and Canada)

If you have a current OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar Advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(United States and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).


In Brief 1-23

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveadvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensors canautomatically alert an OnStaradvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle tosee if you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar advisor to verify youraccount information and toanswer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar emergencyadvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles.Not all OnStar services are

available on all vehicles. For moreinformation, see the OnStar Owner'sGuide; visit www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pressQ tospeak with an OnStar advisor24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations,see the OnStar Owner's Guide inthe glove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar terms and conditionsincluded in the OnStar SubscriberInformation.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.


1-24 In Brief

OnStar service can’t work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider forservice in that area, and thewireless service provider hascoverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar's service.Service involving locationinformation about your vehiclecan’t work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle has to havea working electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment isn’t properlyinstalled or you haven’t maintainedit and your vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in yourvehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems OnStar can’t

control may prevent service to you,such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels,weather, electrical system designand architecture of your vehicle,damage to important parts of yourvehicle in a crash, or wireless phonenetwork congestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the mute buttoncan be used to dial numbers intovoice mail systems, or to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar advisor cannot be heard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system maynot be functioning properly. PushtheQ button and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light appears), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.Push theQ button to confirm thatthe OnStar equipment is active.


Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-6Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-9Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-18Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-19Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22


2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of the vehicle, callRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑8.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 feet) away from thevehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate Shown, Without Similar

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):For vehicles with this feature, seeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑6for additional information.



Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), theparking lamps flash once toindicate locking has occurred.If enabled through the DIC, thehorn sounds when Q is pressedagain within five seconds.See Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑45for additional information.

Pressing Q may arm thecontent theft‐deterrent system.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

K (Unlock): Press once tounlock only the driver door. If K ispressed again within five seconds,all remaining doors unlock.The interior lamps come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until theignition is turned on.

If enabled through the DIC, theparking lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑13.

& (Power Liftgate): Pressand hold until the liftgate begins tomove to open or close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening or closing.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The parkinglamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL for more thantwo seconds to activate the panicalarm. The parking lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedlyfor 30 seconds. The alarm turnsoff when the ignition is moved toON/RUN orL is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes with twotransmitters. Each transmitter willhave a number on it, "1" or "2".These numbers correspond to thedriver of the vehicle. For example,the memory seat position fordriver 1 will be recalled whenusing the transmitter labeled "1",if enabled through the vehiclepersonalization. See “Memory Seatand Mirrors” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 and“Memory Seat Recall” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.



Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehiclewill work. If a transmitter islost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased and programmedthrough your dealer. Whenthe replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must alsobe reprogrammed. Any lost orstolen transmitters will no longerwork once the new transmitteris programmed. Each vehiclecan have up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerto program transmitters to thisvehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any ofthe circuitry on the transmitter.Static from your body coulddamage the transmitter.

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a flathead screwdriver.. Carefully insert the tool

into the notch locatedalong the parting line of thetransmitter. Do not insertthe tool too far. Stop assoon as resistance is felt.

. Twist the tool until thetransmitter is separated.

2. Remove the old battery.Do not use a metal object.



3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing down. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis vehicle may have a remotestarting feature that starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.

/ (Remote Start): This button islocated on the RKE transmitter if thevehicle has remote start.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remote

start to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirementson remote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote startfeature if the vehicle is low on fuel.The vehicle could run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitterfunctions have an increased rangeof operation. However, the rangemay be less while the vehicle isrunning.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3for additional information.

Starting the Engine UsingRemote Start

To start the vehicle:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe parking lamps flash. If thevehicle's lights can not be seen,press and hold/ for at leastfour seconds.

When the vehicle starts the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system will operateautomatically if the vehicle has theautomatic system, or at the samesetting as when the vehicle waslast turned off.



If the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system and heatedseats, the heated seats turn onduring colder outside temperaturesand shut off when the key is turnedto ON/RUN. See Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9 or Heatedand Ventilated Front Seats onpage 3‑10 for more information.

The rear window defogger andheated mirrors, if the vehicle hasthem, turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and turn off when thekey is turned to ON/RUN.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto the ON/RUN position to drive thevehicle.

If the vehicle is left running itautomatically shuts off after10 minutes unless a time extensionhas been done.

Extending Engine Run Time

To extend the engine run time by10 minutes, repeat Steps 1 though 3while the engine is still running.The engine run time can only beextended if it is the first remote startsince the vehicle has been driven.Remote start can be extendedone time.

If the remote start procedure is usedagain before the first 10 minutetime frame has ended, the first10 minutes will immediately expireand the second 10 minute timeframe will start.

For example, if the lock button andthen the remote start buttons arepressed again after the vehiclehas been running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowingthe engine to run for a total of15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using the remotestart button, the ignition must beturned on and then back off beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To manually shut off a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press/ until theparking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition switch on andthen off.



Conditions in Which theRemote Start Will Not Work

The vehicle cannot be started usingthe remote start feature if the key isin the ignition, the hood is open, or ifthere is an emission control systemmalfunction.

The engine turns off during a remotestart if the coolant temperature getstoo high or if the oil pressuregets low.

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily openthe doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a dooris locked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

crash is increased if thedoors are not locked.So, all passengers shouldwear safety belts properlyand the doors should belocked whenever the vehicleis driven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopyour vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent thisfrom happening.

To lock or unlock a door, use thekey from the outside or the doorlock from the inside.

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches arelocated on the front doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.

Q (Lock): Remove the key fromthe ignition and press to lock thedoors.

Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or the lock button on theRKE transmitter twice will overridethe delayed locking feature andimmediately lock all the doors.



This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

This feature can be programmed byusing the Driver Information Center(DIC). See “DELAY DOOR LOCK”under Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑45.

Automatic Door LocksVehicles with an automaticlock/unlock feature enable youto program the vehicle's powerdoor locks. This feature can beprogrammed through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization (With DICButtons) on page 5‑45 for moreinformation.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature protects you fromlocking the key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a frontdoor is open.

If the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driver'sdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the doorto normal operation, turn the slotto the vertical position.



Doors

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, orwith any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

To unlock the liftgate, use thepower door lock switch or pressthe door unlock button on theRKE transmitter twice. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad under the liftgate handle.The vehicle must be in P (Park)to open the liftgate. To close theliftgate, use the pull cup or pullstrap as an aid.

The liftgate will not open if thebattery is disconnected or has lowvoltage. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

If the battery is properly connectedand has adequate voltage, and theliftgate still will not function, thevehicle should be taken to a dealerfor service.



Power Liftgate Operation

The vehicle may have a powerliftgate. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use this feature.

The taillamps will flash and a chimewill sound when the power liftgateis used.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make surethe area above and behind theliftgate is clear before opening it.

The power liftgate can be poweropened and closed in thefollowing ways:. Press and hold the power liftgate

button on the RKE transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

. Press the liftgate button on thecenter console.

. Press the touchpad on theoutside liftgate handle.

Pressing the buttons or touchpad asecond time while the liftgate ismoving reverses the direction.

Power Liftgate Button nearLiftgate Latch

The liftgate can also be closed bypressing the power liftgate buttonnext to the liftgate latch. Press thebutton a second time during liftgateoperation to reverse that operation.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.



If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed andlatched before you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the lights will flash and achime will sound. The liftgate willstay open temporarily, then slowlyclose. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate if thisoccurs.

Obstacle Detection Features

A warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition if the liftgate encounters anobstacle during a power open orclose cycle. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.

If the liftgate comes across moreobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function deactivates, andyou must manually open or closethe liftgate. A message displays,LIFTGATE OPEN, to indicate thatthe liftgate is open. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑25 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 for

more information. After removingthe obstructions, manually open theliftgate to the full open position orclose the liftgate to the fully closedand latched position. The liftgateresumes normal power operation.

The vehicle has pinch sensorslocated on the side edges of theliftgate. If an object is caughtbetween the liftgate and the bodyand presses against this sensor,the liftgate will reverse direction andopen fully. The liftgate will remainopen until it is activated again orclosed manually. Do not force theliftgate open or closed during apower cycle.



Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press the switch on thecenter console to the OFF position.A message displays, POWERLIFTGATE OFF, to indicate thatthe liftgate is manual operation.See Driver Information Center (DIC)(With DIC Buttons) on page 5‑25or Driver Information Center (DIC)(Without DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑29 for more information.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate,use the pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. The liftgate latch willpower close. Always close theliftgate before driving.

If the RKE button or the power closebutton on the liftgate is pressedwhile power operation is disabled,the lights will flash three times, butthe liftgate will not move.

It is not recommended thatyou drive with the liftgate open.However, if you must drive withthe liftgate open, the liftgate shouldbe set to manual operation bypressing the OFF switch on thecenter console.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemOn vehicles with an anti-theft alarmsystem, to activate the system:

. Press Q on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or thepower door lock switch whenany door is open.

The security light flashes.

When the door is closed, thesecurity light stops flashing andstays on solid for approximately30 seconds. The content theftdeterrent alarm is not armeduntil the security light goes off.



If the delayed locking feature isactive, the alarm is not activateduntil all doors are closed and thesecurity light goes off.

. Press Q when the driver dooris closed. The security lightcomes on solid for approximately30 seconds and then goes off.The content theft deterrent alarmis not armed until the securitylight goes off.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manualdoor lock.

If a locked door is opened withoutusing the RKE transmitter, aten second pre-alarm occurs.The horn chirps and the lightsflash. If the key is not placed inthe ignition and turned to STARTor the door is not unlocked by

pressing Q during the ten secondpre-alarm, the alarm goes off.The headlamps flash and the hornsounds for about 30 seconds, thenturns off to save the battery power.

The vehicle can be started with thecorrect ignition key if the alarm hasbeen set off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle with the door

key after the doors are closed.. Unlock the door with the RKE

transmitter. Unlocking a door anyother way sets off the alarm ifthe system has been armed.

Press K or place the key in theignition and turn it to START to turnoff the alarm.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver side window and openthe driver door.

2. Press Q.3. Get out of the vehicle, close the

door and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off thealarm.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould, but the vehicle's headlampsflash, check to see if the hornworks. The horn fuse may be blown.To replace the fuse, see Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑33.

If the alarm does not sound or thevehicle's headlamps do not flash,see your dealer for service.



ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key® III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turnedto ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORYor START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light comes on ifthere is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key® III+ systemsenses an incorrect key, the vehicledoes not start. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start andthe security light on the instrumentpanel comes on when trying to startthe vehicle, there may be a problemwith your theft-deterrent system.Turn the ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key and checkthe fuses. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑33 foradditional information. If the enginestill does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If the

vehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key® III+ to havea new key made. In an emergency,contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑8.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.Up to 10 keys may be programmedto the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys arelost or do not operate, you mustsee your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to havekeys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to get anew key blank that is cut exactly asthe ignition key that operates thesystem.



To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key hasa 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmedkey in the ignition and start theengine. If the engine does notstart, see your dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started,turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmedand turn it to the ON/RUNposition within five seconds ofthe original key being turned tothe LOCK/OFF position.

The security light turns off oncethe key has been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If the PASS-Key® III+ key is lostor damaged, see your dealer or alocksmith to have a new key made.

The SERVICE THEFTDETERRENT SYSTEM messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) when there is aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Anti-Theft AlarmSystem Messages on page 5‑42for additional information.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the theftdeterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.


1. Press (A) or (B) to select themirror.

2. Press on the control pad toadjust the mirror.

3. Press (A) or (B) again todeselect the mirror.

Folding MirrorsFor vehicles with manual foldingmirrors, push the mirror toward thevehicle. Pull the mirror out to returnto its original position.

For vehicles with outside powerfoldaway mirrors:

The controls for power foldawaymirrors are located on thedriver door.

1. Press (A) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (B) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.



Resetting the Power FoldawayMirrors

Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfoldaway mirrors. This sound isnormal after a manual foldingoperation.

Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑4 for moreinformation.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf the vehicle has the automaticdimming mirror, the driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you.This feature is controlled by theon and off setting on the insiderearview mirror. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑19 for more information.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the outside mirrors havea park tilt feature. This feature tiltsthe outside mirrors to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This allows the driverto view the curb for parallel parking.

The passenger and/or driver mirrorreturns to its original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted outof R (Reverse), or the ignition isturned off or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be turned on oroff through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorAdjust the inside rearview mirrorfor a clear view of the area behindyour vehicle. To avoid glare of theheadlamps from behind, push thetab forward for daytime and pull itfor nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar Owner's Guide formore information about the servicesOnStar provides.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.

Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight illuminates each time theignition is turned to start.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may also have a RearVision Camera (RVC). See RearVision Camera (RVC) on page 9‑38for more information.

If the vehicle has RVC,theO button for turning thedimming feature on or off willnot be available.

Vehicles with OnStar have threeadditional control buttons for theOnStar system. See your dealerfor more information about OnStarand how to subscribe to it. See theOnStar Owner Guide for moreinformation about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.



Uplevel shown, base similar

The power window controls arelocated on each of the side doors.

The driver door also has switchesthat control the passenger andrear windows. The power windowswork with the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP)is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull up on the front edgeof the switch to raise the window.

Express-Up/Express-DownWindows

A window with the express‐up/downfeature allows it to be raised orlowered without holding the switch.Press or pull the window switchfully and release it to activate theexpress feature. The express modecan be canceled by pressing orpulling the switch.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected,or replaced, windows with theexpress-up feature need to bereprogrammed for this feature towork. To program the window:

1. Close all doors with the ignitionin the ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN position, orwhen Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active.See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑19.

2. Press and continue to hold thewindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull up and hold the windowswitch to close the window.Continue to hold it briefly afterthe window is fully closed.

4. Repeat for each window that hasthe express-up feature.

Anti-Pinch Feature

The anti-pinch feature is onwindows with the express-upfeature. If an object is in the way ofthe window as it is express-closing,or in certain weather conditionslike severe icing, the window willstop and open to a factory presetposition. The window functionsnormally once the obstruction isremoved.



Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The windowlockout switch is located with thepower window switches on thedriver door armrest. This featureprevents the rear windows frombeing operated, except from thedriver position. Press the switch toturn the lockout feature on or off.An indicator light will come on toshow the lockout feature is on.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor fromthe center mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod ifavailable.

Roof

SunroofThe ignition must be in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY to operatethe sunroof and power sunshade.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19.

The vehicle may have a sunroofover the front seats and a rearsunroof over the second row seats.The rear sunroof does not open.The switch to operate the frontsunroof is on the headliner abovethe rearview mirror.



Do not keep the sunroof openfor long periods of time while thevehicle is not in use. Dirt and debrismay collect on the sunroof seal orin the tracks that could cause anissue with sunroof operation, noiseor plug the water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof sealand roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from sunroof.

Vent: From the closed position,press and hold the front of theswitch to vent the sunroof. Pressand hold the rear of the switch toclose the sunroof.

Express-open/Express-close:From the closed position, press andrelease the rear of the switch toexpress-open the sunroof. Pressand release the front of the switchto express-close the sunroof.

The front sunshade must be openedand closed manually. Push up onthe sunshade handle to open thesunshade.

Manual Sunshades

On a vehicle with only manualsunshades, press the button on thesunshade handle to release it andguide it back. Pull the sunshadeforward until it latches to close it.

Rear Power Sunshade

On vehicles with a rear powersunshade, the switch is on theheadliner above the rearview mirror.

Notice: The rear sunshade couldbe damaged if you attempt toopen or close it manually. Do notmanually open or close the rearsunshade.

To open the rear sunshade, locatedover the second row seats, pressand release the rear of the switch.Press and release the front of theswitch to close the sunshade.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-31Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-31Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-35When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-46

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-47Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-53Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-55Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants will suffera neck/spinal injury in a crash.Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

1. Pull the head restraint up toraise it. To lower the headrestraint, press the releasebutton, located on the headrestraint post on the top ofthe seatback, while you pushthe head restraint down.

2. Push down on the head restraintafter the button is released tomake sure that it is locked inplace.



The vehicle's second‐row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's third‐row seats haveheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

The vehicle's head restraints andheadrests are not designed to beremoved.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

A. Manual Seat AdjustmentHandle.

B. Driver Seat Height Adjuster.

C. See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Lift the handle (A) under the seatto unlock it.

2. Slide the seat and release thehandle.

Try to move the seat to be sure it islocked in place.



To manually raise or lower the seat,move the lever (B) repeatedlyupward or downward.

Power Seat Adjustment

Driver Seat with Power SeatControl, Power Recline,

and Power Lumbar Shown

A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.

B. Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑7 .

C. Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑6 .

On vehicles with power seats, thecontrols are on the outboard side ofthe seats.

Move the seat forward orrearward by sliding the powerseat adjustment control (A) forwardor rearward.

The vehicle may have additionalfeatures to adjust the power seat:. Raise or lower the entire

seat by moving the powerseat adjustment control (A) upor down.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the rear part ofthe seat cushion by moving therear of the control up or down.

Memory Seat and Mirrors

On vehicles with the memorypackage, the controls on the driverdoor are used to program and recallmemory settings for the driver seatand outside mirrors.



Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outsidemirrors.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑17 for more information.

Not all vehicles will have theability to save and recall themirror positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall the memory positions,press and release “1” or “2.”The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seatand outside mirrors will move to theposition previously stored for theidentified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat and outside mirrors tostored positions when entering thevehicle.

To activate memory remote recall,unlock the driver door with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. The driver seat andoutside mirrors will move to thememory position associated withthe transmitter used to unlock thevehicle.

The automatic recall featurecan be turned on or off using thevehicle personalization menu. See“Memory Seat Recall” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

To stop recall movement of thememory feature, press one of thepower seat controls, memorybuttons, or the power mirror buttons.

If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

The easy exit driver seat featurecan move the seat rearward to allowextra room to exit the vehicle.

S (Easy Exit Driver Seat): Pressto recall the easy exit seat position.The vehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit seat feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticseat movement occurs when theignition key is removed.



A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in). To move the seat backfarther, press the easy exit seatbutton again until the seat is all theway back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See “Easy Exit Seat” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

Lumbar Adjustment

Manual Lumbar

On vehicles with this feature, thehandle is located on the inboardside of the seatback.

Move the handle forward orrearward to increase or decreaselumbar support.

Power Lumbar

On vehicles with power lumbar, thecontrols used to operate this featureare located on the outboard sideof the seats. See Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 formore information.

To increase or decrease lumbarsupport, press and hold the frontor rear of the control (C).

Release the control when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.



Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

On vehicles with seats that havemanual reclining seatbacks, thelever used to operate them islocated on the outboard side ofthe seat.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.




Power Reclining Seatbacks

On vehicles with seats that havepower reclining seatbacks, thecontrols used to operate them areon the outboard side of the seats.. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline the seatback.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise the seatback.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, such asa blanket, cushion, cover orsimilar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the centerconsole. To operate the heatedseats the engine must be running.

I (Heated Seatback): Press toturn on the heated seatback.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to turn on or off the heatedseat and seatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.



Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start.The heated seats will be canceledwhen the ignition is turned on.Press the desired heated seatbutton to use the heated seatsafter the vehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑6 for more information.

Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

On vehicles with the heatedand ventilated seat feature, thecontrols are on the center console.To operate the heated seats theengine must be running.

H (Ventilated Seat): Press toventilate the entire seat.

J (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the entire seat.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then to

the off setting. The lights indicatethree for the highest setting and onefor the lowest.

The passenger heated seat maytake longer to heat up.

The heated and ventilated seatsare canceled after the ignition isturned off.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats may turn on automaticallyduring a remote vehicle start.The heated seats will be canceledwhen the ignition is turned on.Press the heated seat button touse the heated seats after thevehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑6 for more information.



Rear Seats

A. Seat Adjustment Handle

B. Reclining Seatback Strap

C. Sliding Seat Lever

Entering and Exiting theThird Row

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

To access the third row:

1. Remove objects on the floor infront of or on the second rowseat, or in the seat tracks onthe floor.

2. Move the front center consolearmrest completely forward.See Center Console Storageon page 4‑2 .



3. Place folding armrests in theupright position.

4. Ensure that the safety belt isunfastened and in the stowedposition.

5. Pull the sliding seat lever (C)forward and move the seatbackforward. The seat cushion willfold, and the entire seat will slideforward. The head restraints willfold out of the way automatically.

Returning the Seat to theSeating Position

To return the second row seat to itsnormal seating position:

1. Remove objects on the floorbehind the second row seat orin the seat tracks on the floor.

2. Pull the seatback rearward untilit is locked in place.

3. Slide the seat rearward bypushing on the seatback until itis locked into place.

4. Return the head restraint to theupright position by reachingbehind the seat and pulling thehead restraint forward until itlocks into place.

Push and pull on the headrestraint to make sure that itis locked.

5. Push down on the rear of theseat cushion until it is locked inplace.

6. Push and pull on the seatbackand seat cushion to make surethey are locked in place.

7. Check that the safety belt is notunder the seat cushion.

Reclining the Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Leaning forward in the seat, pullthe reclining seatback strap (B).

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe strap to lock the seatback inplace.


Folding the Rear Seat

To fold the second row seats:

1. Remove anything on or underthe seat.

2. Place the armrest in the uprightposition, and unfasten thesafety belt.

3. Pull forward on the recliningseatback strap (B) and pushdown on the seatback.

The head restraint will fold downautomatically.



To return the seatback to theseating position, lift the uppercorner of the seatback and push itrearward until it locks into place.Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked. Pull up onthe head restraint to return it to theupright, locked position.

Adjusting the Seats

To adjust the second row seats, pulloutward on the seat adjustmenthandle (A). Slide the seat forwardor rearward to the desired position.Release the handle and push andpull on the seat to make sure it islocked.

Third Row Seats

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second rowis folded, or pushed forward inthe entry position, could causeinjury in a sudden stop or crash.Be sure to return the seat to thepassenger seating position. Pushand pull on the seat to make sureit is locked into place.

The third row seats can be foldedforward or removed.


To fold the seatback:


2. Disconnect the rear safety beltmini-latch, using a key in theslot on the mini-buckle, let thebelt retract into the headliner.Stow the mini-latch in the holderlocated in the headliner.



3. Pull up on the release leverlocated on the back of the seat.

4. Push the seatback forward tolay flat.

To return the seatback to theseating position:

1. Raise the seatback into place byusing the pullstrap from the rearof the vehicle, or by pushing itinto place from inside thevehicle.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

2. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked in place.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.

4. Pull on the safety belt to be surethe mini-latch is secure.



Removing the Third Row Seats

1. Remove the cargo managementsystem, if it is in the vehicle.See Cargo Management Systemon page 4‑3 .



3. Fold the seatback down.See “Folding the Seatback”earlier in this section.

4. Remove the rear bolts locatedon the floor on each side ofthe seat.

5. Remove the seat by tilting itslightly upward, and then pullingit out of the rear of the vehicle inone motion.

6. Replace the bolts in the floorholes for storage.

Installing the Third Row Seats

1. Before installing the seatthe seatback must be foldedforward. See “Folding theSeatback” earlier in this section.

The seats must be placed inthe proper locations to attachcorrectly. The wider seat mustbe installed on the driver sideand the narrower seat on thepassenger side. Remove thebolts from the holes in the floorbefore installing the seats.

2. Place the seat on the vehiclefloor so that the front seat hooksare on the vehicle bars.

3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to55Y (41 lb ft). Pull up on theseat to make sure it is locked inplace.

4. Raise the seatback to its uprightposition. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked into place.

5. Reconnect the center safety beltmini-latch to the mini-buckle.Do not let it twist.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you oryour passenger(s) are notwearing safety belts, the injuriescan be much worse. You can hitthings inside the vehicle harderor be ejected from the vehicle.You and your passenger(s) canbe seriously injured or killed. Inthe same crash, you might not be,if you are buckled up. Alwaysfasten your safety belt, andcheck that your passenger(s)are restrained properly too.

{ WARNING

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision, peopleriding in these areas are morelikely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ridein any area of your vehicle thatis not equipped with seats andsafety belts. Be sure everyonein your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑15 for additionalinformation.

In most states and in all Canadianprovinces, the law requires wearingsafety belts. Here is why:

You never know if you will be ina crash. If you do have a crash,you do not know if it will be aserious one.

A few crashes are mild, and somecrashes can be so serious that evenbuckled up, a person would notsurvive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, peoplewho buckle up can survive andsometimes walk away. Withoutsafety belts they could have beenbadly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safetybelts in vehicles, the facts are clear.In most crashes buckling up doesmatter ... a lot!



Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,you go as fast as it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Supposeit is just a seat on wheels.

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop thevehicle. The rider does not stop.



The person keeps going untilstopped by something. In a realvehicle, it could be the windshield...

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow downas the vehicle does. You get moretime to stop. You stop over moredistance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safetybelts make such good sense.



Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt ornot. But your chance of beingconscious during and after anaccident, so you can unbuckleand get out, is much greater ifyou are belted. And you canunbuckle a safety belt, even ifyou are upside down.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they workwith safety belts — not insteadof them. Whether or not anairbag is provided, all occupantsstill have to buckle up to getthe most protection. That istrue not only in frontal collisions,but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and Inever drive far from home,why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver,but if you are in a crash — evenone that is not your fault — youand your passenger(s) can behurt. Being a good driver doesnot protect you from thingsbeyond your control, suchas bad drivers.

Most accidents occur within40 km (25miles) of home.And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deathsoccur at speeds of less than65 km/h (40 mph).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

Be aware that there are specialthings to know about safety beltsand children. And there are differentrules for smaller children andinfants. If a child will be riding inthe vehicle, see Older Children onpage 3‑48 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3‑50. Followthose rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

Occupants who are not buckled upcan be thrown out of the vehicle in acrash. And they can strike others inthe vehicle who are wearing safetybelts.



First, before you or yourpassenger(s) wear a safety belt,there is important information youshould know.

Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in front of you.The lap part of the belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, thisapplies force to the strong pelvicbones and you would be less likelyto slide under the lap belt. If youslid under it, the belt would applyforce on your abdomen. This couldcause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go overthe shoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restraining forces.

The shoulder belt locks if there is asudden stop or crash.

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose.It will not give as muchprotection this way.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourshoulder belt is too loose. In acrash, you would move forwardtoo much, which could increaseinjury. The shoulder belt should fitsnugly against your body.


A: The lap belt is too loose. It willnot give nearly as muchprotection this way.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously hurt if yourlap belt is too loose. In a crash,you could slide under the lapbelt and apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.The lap belt should be wornlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.




A: The belt is buckled in the wrongbuckle.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt is buckled in the wrongplace like this. In a crash, the beltwould go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not on the pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries. Always buckle your beltinto the buckle nearest you.


A: The belt is over an armrest.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyour belt goes over an armrestlike this. The belt would be muchtoo high. In a crash, you can slideunder the belt. The belt forcewould then be applied on theabdomen, not on the pelvicbones, and that could causeserious or fatal injuries. Be surethe belt goes under the armrests.


A: The shoulder belt is worn underthe arm. It should be worn overthe shoulder at all times.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured ifyou wear the shoulder belt underyour arm. In a crash, your bodywould move too far forward,which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also,the belt would apply too muchforce to the ribs, which are notas strong as shoulder bones.You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver orspleen. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.




A: The belt is behind the body.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured bynot wearing the lap-shoulder beltproperly. In a crash, you wouldnot be restrained by the shoulderbelt. Your body could movetoo far forward increasing thechance of head and neck injury.You might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.


A: The belt is twisted acrossthe body.



{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured by atwisted belt. In a crash, you wouldnot have the full width of the beltto spread impact forces. If a beltis twisted, make it straight so itcan work properly, or ask yourdealer to fix it.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

If you are using a rear seatingposition with a detachable safetybelt and the safety belt is notattached, see Third Row Seats onpage 3‑13 for instruction onreconnecting the safety belt tothe mini-buckle.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

4. Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑31.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

5. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjuster” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

6. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullthe stitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position. Slidethe latch plate up the safety beltwebbing when the safety belt is notin use. The latch plate should reston the stitching on the safety belt,near the guide loop on the side wall.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder but not falling off of it.The belt should be close to butnot contacting the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectivenessof the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, push down onthe button (A) and move the heightadjuster to the desired position.You can move the height adjusterup by pushing up on the shoulderbelt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the button to makesure it has locked into position.



Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for the front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tighten thesafety belts during the early stagesof a moderate to severe frontal,near frontal, or rear crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, for vehicleswith side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a side crash or arollover event.

Pretensioners work only once.If the pretensioners activate in acrash, they will need to be replaced,and probably other new parts forthe vehicle's safety belt system.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts After a Crash on page 3‑32.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, theyare available through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the shoulder beltaway from the neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

Outboard Positions

1. For the outboard positions,remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

For the third row center position,locate the comfort guide whichis located in a storage pocket,at the top of the seat, under theheadrest on the driver's side of



the vehicle. To access thecomfort guide, you will first needto move the headrest forward bypulling on the handle behind theseatback. The comfort guide willnow be accessible.

Third Row Center Position

Pull the comfort guide out ofits storage location and thenreturn the headrest to its uprightposition.

2. Place the guide over the beltand insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt isnot twisted and it lies flat.The elastic cord must be underthe belt and the guide on top.



{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Slide the guide into its storagelocation or on its storage clip.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.



The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.

To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are workingproperly. Look for any other looseor damaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care onpage 3‑31.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driver,passenger seated directlybehind the driver, and thethird row outboard passengerposition.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger, passengerseated directly behind the rightfront passenger, and the thirdrow outboard passengerposition.



All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— evenif you have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑36.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in yourvehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Airbags inflate with great force,faster than the blink of an eye.Anyone who is up against, orvery close to, any airbag when itinflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Do not sit unnecessarilyclose to the airbag, as you wouldbe if you were sitting on the edgeof your seat or leaning forward.Safety belts help keep you inposition before and during acrash. Always wear your safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean onor sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag systemis designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly inyour vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 3‑48 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑50.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16for more information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side shown, PassengerSide similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, passengersbehind the driver and right frontpassenger, and the third rowoutboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properly

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path ofan inflating roof-rail airbag willbe blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's orright front passenger's head andchest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflateat different crash speeds.For example:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact.For moderate frontal impacts,dual-stage airbags inflate at alevel less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts,full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑32.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts.



Roof-rail airbags are notintended to inflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck. Bothroof-rail airbags will deploy wheneither side of the vehicle is struck,or if the sensing system predictsthat the vehicle is about to roll over,or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags,there are airbag modules in the sideof the front seatbacks closest tothe door. For vehicles with roof-railairbags, there are airbag modules inthe ceiling of the vehicle, near theside windows that have occupantseating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of thevehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts.Frontal airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body,stopping the occupant moregradually. Seat‐mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbagsdistribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant'supper body.



Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the riskof full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑36 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑38.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soonas it is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers, and shut off thefuel system after the airbags inflate.



You can lock the doors, turn off theinterior lamps and hazard warningflashers by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakagemay also occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑17 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑17.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.



Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the instrument panel when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If youare using remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that

an infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.



For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating postureand body build. Everyone in thevehicle who has outgrown childrestraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) on page 3‑63or Securing Child Restraints(Right Front Passenger Seat) onpage 3‑65.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2 .

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.



If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑46 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.



A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens,the off indicator will be lit, andthe airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable (turnon) the passenger airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag is turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not installa child restraint or allow anyoneto occupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16for important safety information.

The on indicator may be lit ifan object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑15.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after theignition is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passenger

seat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operateproperly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim,or with GM covers, upholsteryor trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑41.

If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction

Procedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑58 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 13‑1.

In addition, the dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑16 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbag modules,see What Makes an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑38. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in your vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure your airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle's safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑25 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑25.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance of

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

head and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle andnever allow children to playwith the safety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young children

and infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or achild while riding in a vehicle.Due to crash forces, an infantor a child will become so heavyit is not possible to hold it duringa crash. For example, in a crashat only 40 km/h (25 mph), a5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenlybecome a 110 kg (240 lb) force ona person's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is also

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

better to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back asit will go.



Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicle'sowner, are available in fourbasic types. Selection of aparticular restraint should takeinto consideration not only thechild's weight, height, and agebut also whether or not therestraint will be compatible withthe motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight and

height limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries duringa crash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.



Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improvethe fit of the vehicle's safety beltsystem. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.



Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle's safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap belt

portion of a lap-shoulder belt, orby the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑56 formore information. Children can beendangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when nochild is in it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If you securea forward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑41 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers orchild restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access toor interferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with

a top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH systemin your vehicle, you need achild restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchorsthe top of the child restraint tothe vehicle. A top tether anchor isbuilt into the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have asingle attachment (B) to securethe top tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

If the child restraint does not havea top tether, one can be obtained,in kit form, for many child restraints.Ask the child restraint manufacturerwhether or not a kit is available.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — Bucket

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Second Row — 60/40 Bench


j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

Third Row




To assist you in locating the loweranchors, each second row anchorposition has a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locating the toptether anchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is located on the cover ornear the anchor.

Second Row — Bucket Shown,Bench Similar

The top tether anchors are locatedat the bottom rear of the seatbackfor each seating position in thesecond row. Open the cover toaccess the anchors. Be sure touse an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraintwill be placed.

Third Row Seat

The third row has one top tetheranchor located at the bottom rearof the center seatback. This anchorshould be used for the centerseating position only. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

Accident statistics show thatchildren are safer if they arerestrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑55 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle'ssafety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with the child restraintand the instructions in thismanual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if your vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rearseat with a safety belt buckled.This could damage the safety beltor the seat. Unbuckle and returnthe safety belt to its stowedposition, before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Recline the seatback to thefull reclined position.

Make sure the secondrow bench seatbacks arealigned at the same angle

before placing the childrestraint on the seat. Makesure the third row benchseatbacks are both uprightbefore placing the childrestraint on the seat.

1.3. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.4. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if the vehicle has one.Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the followingsteps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. If the anchor is covered, flipopen the cover to exposethe anchor.



2.3. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a dual tether, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sureit is securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the LATCH pathand attempt to move it sideto side and back ‐and forth.There should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, forproper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury oreven death in a crash. To helpmake sure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑56 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑56 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑55.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the shoulder belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑56 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Right FrontPassenger Seat)The vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑55.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑41 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑16 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING


Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, no

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑41 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑56 for howand where to install the childrestraint using LATCH. If a childrestraint is secured using a safetybelt and it uses a top tether, seeLower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑56 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off theright front passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when the vehicle is started.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑16.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑41 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo ManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel StorageThis vehicle has an instrumentpanel storage area located abovethe radio. To open the cover, pressthe button.

Glove BoxLift the glove box handle to open it.Use the key to lock and unlock theglove box.

CupholdersThere are two cupholders, withremovable liners, located in frontof the center console. There maybe cupholders located in the secondrow seat armrest. To access,pull the armrest down. There areadditional cupholders located oneach side of the third row seatand in each door. There may becupholders located at the rear ofthe center console. To access,pull the handle down.


4-2 Storage

Armrest StorageVehicles with a rear seat armrest,have two cupholders. Pull thearmrest down from the rearseatback to access the cupholders.

Center Console Storage

Pull up on the lever, located on thefront of the center console armrest,to slide it forward and backward.

To open the armrest storage area,press the button located on the frontof the armrest. There is additionalstorage under the armrest. Movethe armrest all the way to the rearposition, slide the cover back andremove the tray.

Floor Console Storage

For vehicles with a second rowcenter console, open each area toaccess the storage compartmentinside.

To access the upper storage area,press the upper button (B) and liftup. To access the lower storagearea, press the lower button (C)and lift up. The top of the consolecan be folded forward for increasedstorage area. Lift up on handle onthe rear of the console (A) and pullforward.


Storage 4-3

{ WARNING

Never open more than one of thethree latches at a time to helpavoid personal injury and damageto the console.

Notice: Slide the front consoleas far forward as it will go beforefolding the second row consoleforward to help prevent damageto the consoles.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, itcan be used to cover items in therear of the vehicle. To install thecover, place the loops on eachcorner of the cover on the fourhooks in the rear of the vehicle.The cover should be stored securelywhen not in use.

Cargo Tie DownsFour cargo tie‐downs are located inthe rear compartment of the vehicle.The tie-downs can be used tosecure small loads.

Cargo ManagementSystemThis vehicle has a cargomanagement system locatedin the rear.


4-4 Storage

To remove the cargo managementcover:

1. Open the cover. It remains openwhen lifted.

2. Pull the cover up making sure tounhook the hinges at the rear ofthe cover.

{ WARNING

An improperly latched and closedcargo cover, or cargo cover left inthe open position, could be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

thrown about the vehicle duringa crash or sudden maneuver.Someone could be injured.Be sure to return the cover tothe closed position and latchbefore driving. If the cover isremoved, always store it outsideof the vehicle. When it isreplaced, always be sure thatit is securely reattached.

3. Remove the cover from thevehicle and store outside of thevehicle.

Convenience NetFor vehicles with a conveniencenet in the rear, use it to store smallloads as far forward as possible.The net should not be used to storeheavy loads.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— the windcan catch it while the vehicle isbeing driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collision,and damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMCertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GM Certifiedcrossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.


Storage 4-5

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle.

For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.


4-6 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-5Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-16Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-22StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . 5-22Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-23Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam on Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Information DisplaysDriver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) . . . 5-25

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Without DICButtons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . 5-32

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-37Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-37Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-37Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-39Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-40Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-40Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-40Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-42Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-42Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-44Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-45Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-45

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-53Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel Controls

Vehicles with audio steering wheelcontrols could differ depending onthe vehicle's options. Some audiocontrols can be adjusted at thesteering wheel.



w /x (Next / Previous): Pressto select preset or favorite radiostations, select tracks on aCD/DVD, or to select tracks andnavigate folders on an iPod® orUSB device.

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

. Press and releasew orx togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orx to go tothe next or previous track.

To select tracks on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles withouta navigation system:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list, thenpress and holdw, or press ¨ toplay the highlighted track.

To select tracks on an iPod or USBdevice for vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song listed in themain audio page, to quicklymove forward or in reversethrough the tracks. See theseparate Navigation Systemmanual for more information.

Track information is displayed onthe screen. Releasew orxwhen the desired track isreached.

2. Press and releasex to beginplaying the track shown in thedisplay.

To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles without anavigation system:

1. Press and holdw orx whilelistening to a song until thecontents of the current folderdisplay on the radio display.

2. Press and holdx to go back tothe previous folder list.

3. Press and releasew orx toscroll up or down the list.. To select a folder, press

and holdw, or press ¨when the folder ishighlighted.

. To go back further in thefolder list, press andholdx.



To navigate folders on an iPod orUSB device for vehicles with anavigation system:

1. Go to the Music Navigator byfirst touching the center touchscreen folder button in the mainaudio page.

2. While in Music Navigator, selectthe folder/artist/genre/category,etc. using the touch screen.

3. Press and releasex to scrollthrough the selected music list.Touch the track label on thetouch screen to highlight andbegin playing the track fromthat list.

4. Press and holdx to quicklyscroll through the selectedmusic list

b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar® systems, press and holdfor longer than two seconds to

interact with those systems.See Bluetooth on page 7‑49 andthe OnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

c (End): Press to reject anincoming call, or end a current call.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio, CD, and forvehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press and hold thisbutton for longer than one secondto initiate voice recognition.See “Voice Recognition” in theNavigation System manual formore information.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to thenext radio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

For vehicles with or without anavigation system:

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beepis heard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode, a station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

3. In CD/DVD, iPod, or AUX USB,press and hold to quickly moveforward through the tracks.Release to stop on the desiredtrack.

+ e − e (Volume): Press toincrease or to decrease the volume.

HornPress near the horn symbols orpress on the steering wheel pad tosound the horn.



Windshield Wiper/WasherThe windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the left side of thesteering column.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn theband to8 and then release.Several wipes, hold the bandon8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

1 : Slow wipes.

2 : Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.

Windshield Washer

J (Washer Fluid): Press thebutton at the end of the turnsignal/lane change lever, to spraywasher fluid on the windshield.The wipers clear the windshield andeither stop or return to the presetspeed. The ignition key must be inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN forthis to work. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do notuse your washer until thewindshield is warmed. Otherwisethe washer fluid can form ice onthe windshield, blocking yourvision.

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID is displayed on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) when thewasher fluid is low. See WasherFluid Messages on page 5‑45.



Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper and rear wash buttonis located on the instrument panelbelow the climate control system.

Z (Rear Wiper): Press to turn therear wiper on and off. The wiperspeed cannot be changed.

Y (Wash): Press to spraywasher fluid on the rear window.The window wiper will also comeon. Release the button whenenough fluid has been sprayedon the window. The rear wiper willrun a few more cycles after it isreleased. If the rear wiper functionwas already on, prior to pressingthe wash button, it stays on untilthe wiper button is pressed again.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid that is in the windshieldwasher reservoir. See Washer Fluidon page 10‑23.

CompassYour vehicle may have a compassin the Driver Information Center(DIC). See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑25 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑29 for more informationabout the DIC.

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealerwill set the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving toa new state or province, it willbe necessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zoneis not set correctly.

Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zonein which the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance, usethe following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving. Onlyset it when the vehicle is inP (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.



2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil the vehicle heading,for example, N for North,is displayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does not show aheading, for example, N for North,or the heading does not changeafter making turns, there may bea strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interferencemay be caused by a magnetic CBor cell phone antenna mount, amagnetic emergency light, magneticnote pad holder, or any othermagnetic item. Turn off the vehicle,move the magnetic item, then turnon the vehicle and calibrate thecompass.



To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zoneis set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

ClockTo adjust the time and date:

1. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,then pressO, to turn theradio on.

2. Press G to display HR, MIN,MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute,month, day, and year).

3. Press the pushbutton locatedunder any one of the labels tobe changed.

4. To increase the time or date,do one of the following:. Press the pushbutton below

the selected label.

. Press ¨ SEEK.

. Press\ FWD.

. Turn f clockwise.

5. To decrease the time or date, doone of the following:

. Press © SEEK.

. Presss REV.

. Turn f counter‐clockwise.



To change the time default settingfrom 12 hour to 24 hour or tochange the date default setting frommonth/day/year to day/month/year:

1. Press G and then thepushbutton located under theforward arrow that displays onthe radio screen until the time12H (hour) and 24H (hour),and the date MM/DD (monthand day) and DD/MM (dayand month) displays.

2. Press the pushbutton locatedunder the desired option.

3. Press G again to apply theselected default, or let thescreen time out.

Power OutletsThe vehicle has three 12‐volt outletsthat can be used to plug in electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

The power outlets are located onthe instrument panel below theclimate controls, at the rear of thecenter console, and in the rearcargo area. Lift the cover to accessthe outlet and replace when notin use.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain accessory plugs may notbe compatible with the accessorypower outlet and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.



When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9‑56.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.

Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plugit back in or turn the RemoteAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19. The power restartswhen equipment using 150 wattsor less is plugged into the outlet anda system fault is not detected.



The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high

initial peak wattage suchas: compressor-drivenrefrigerators and electricpower tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touchsensor lamps, etc.

See High Voltage Devices andWiring on page 10‑32.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gaugescould prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper-resistantodometer. If the vehicle needs anew odometer installed, the newone is set to the mileage of the oldodometer. If this is not possible,it is set at zero and a label is puton the driver's door to show theold mileage reading.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows how much fuel is leftin the tank.

An arrow in the fuel gauge indicatesthe side of the vehicle the fuel dooris on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel,the vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

When the fuel tank is low on fuel,the FUEL LEVEL LOW messagewill appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). For more informationsee Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑40.



Here are some situations that mayoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric English

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature. Under normaldriving conditions the gauge willread approximately 100 °C (210°F)or less. If the gauge pointer is near125 °C (260°F), the engine istoo hot.

It means that the engine coolanthas overheated. If the vehicle hasbeen operating under normal drivingconditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle and turn off the engine assoon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for more information.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the engine is not running, butthe ignition is turned on, this gaugeshows the battery's state of chargein DC volts.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The vehicle'scharging system regulates voltagebased on the state of charge of thebattery. The voltmeter may fluctuate.This is normal. Readings betweenthe low and high warning zonesindicate the normal operating range.



Readings in the low warning zonemay occur when a large number ofelectrical accessories are operatingin the vehicle and the engine is leftidling for an extended period.

If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, a SERVICEBATTERY CHARGING SYSTEMmessage will appear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and/or thecharging system light comes on.See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑36 for moreinformation.

However, readings in either warningzone may indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

The driver safety belt reminder lighton the instrument panel cluster.

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stayon for several seconds to remindthe driver to fasten the safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This cycle repeats if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the driver safety belt is alreadybuckled, neither the light nor chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the engine is started this lightand the chime come on and stay onfor several seconds to remind thepassenger to fasten their safety belt.The light also begins to flash.

This only occurs if the passengerairbag is enabled. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑41 formore information.

This cycle repeats if the passengerremains unbuckled and the vehicleis moving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop or otherelectronic device. To turn off thewarning light and or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with theairbag system. The system checkincludes the airbag sensor, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑32.

The airbag readiness light comeson and stay on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started.Then the light turns off.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑41for important safety information.The instrument panel has apassenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds



as a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑16 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, as

a check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light ison could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC) alsodisplays the SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM message.

See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑36 for more information.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors operationof the fuel, ignition, and emissioncontrol systems. It ensures thatemissions are at acceptable levelsfor the life of the vehicle, helping toproduce a cleaner environment.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with thislight on, after a while, theemission controls might notwork as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made tothe engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)can affect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause thislight to come on. Modificationsto these systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. This couldalso result in a failure topass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.



This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

An emission system malfunctionmight be corrected:. Make sure the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑45. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. If the vehicle has been driventhrough a deep puddle of water,the vehicle's electrical systemmight be wet. The conditionis usually corrected when theelectrical system dries out.A few driving trips shouldturn the light off.

. Make sure to fuel the vehiclewith quality fuel. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to run asefficiently as designed and cancause: stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of theseconditions occurs, change thefuel brand used. It will require atleast one full tank of the properfuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑43.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.



Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some state/provincial and localgovernments may have programsto inspect the on-vehicle emissioncontrol equipment. For theinspection, the emission systemtest equipment is connectedto the vehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed by thesystem. This can happen ifthe battery has recently beenreplaced or if the battery hasrun down. The diagnosticsystem evaluates criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection, your dealer canprepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the ignition key is turned toON/RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be readyto warn if there is a problem.



This light may also come on dueto low brake fluid. See Brakes onpage 10‑24 for more information.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will also comeon when the parking brake is set.The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If itstays on after the parking brake isfully released, it means there is abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased. The pedal may be harderto push or, the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, havethe vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑89.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The ABS warning light comes onbriefly when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN. This is normal.If the light does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready towarn you if there is a problem.

If the light stays on, turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. If the light comeson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.



Then start the engine again to resetthe system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is noton, there are still brakes, but noantilock brakes. If the regular brakesystem warning light is also on,there are no antilock brakes andthere is a problem with the regularbrakes. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

This light comes on when theTow/Haul mode has been activated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑28.

StabiliTrak® IndicatorLight

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light goes off.

If it stays on, or comes on whiledriving, there could be a problemwith the StabiliTrak system and thevehicle might need service. Whenthis warning light is on, the systemis off and will not limit wheel spin.

This light flashes when theStabiliTrak system is active.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31 for more information.

Engine CoolantTemperature WarningLight

The engine coolant temperaturewarning light comes on briefly whenthe engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, the vehicle may havea problem with the cooling system.Stop the vehicle and turn off theengine to avoid damage to theengine. A warning chime soundswhen this light is on.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for more information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with a Tire PressureMonitor System, this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.It provides information about tirepressures and the Tire PressureMonitor System.

When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑43 formore information. Stop as soonas possible, and inflate the tires tothe pressure value shown on theTire and Loading Information Label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑46for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen is On Steady

This indicates that there may bea problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System. The light flashesfor about a minute and stays onsteady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑49 formore information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem.



Security Light

This light flashes when the securitysystem is activated.

For more information, see Anti-TheftAlarm System on page 2‑13.

High-Beam on Light

The high-beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The fog lamp light comes on whenthe fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes on whenever thecruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons)If your vehicle has DIC buttons,the information below explains theoperation of this system.

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located at the top of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.

The DIC also displays a shift leverposition indicator on the bottomline of the display. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑25 formore information.

The outside air temperature andcompass, if equipped, also displayon the DIC when viewing the tripand fuel information. The outsideair temperature automaticallyappears in the top right cornerof the DIC display. If there is aproblem with the system thatcontrols the temperature display,the numbers will be replaced withdashes. If this occurs, have thevehicle serviced. The compass willbe shown in the bottom right cornerof the DIC display. See Compasson page 5‑6 for more information.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel.

The DIC also allows some featuresto be customized. See VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons, youcan also use the trip odometer resetstem to view the odometer and tripodometers.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the set/reset,customization, vehicle information,and trip/fuel buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

V (Set/Reset): Press this button toset or reset certain functions and toturn off or acknowledge messageson the DIC.

U (Customization): Pressthis button to customize thefeature settings on your vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑45 formore information.



T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to display the oil life,park assist on vehicles with thisfeature, units, tire pressure readingson vehicles with this feature, andcompass calibration and zonesetting on vehicles with this feature.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press thisbutton to display the odometer, tripodometers, fuel range, averageeconomy, timer, fuel used, andaverage speed.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressthis button to scroll through thefollowing menu items:

OIL LIFE

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life system

will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑39. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition tothe engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenanceis recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeScheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,press the vehicle informationbutton until PARK ASSIST displays.This display allows the system tobe turned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset button toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPAsystem automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off.See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑41 andUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑36 for more information.



UNITS

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between Metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenMETRIC or ENGLISH units. All ofthe vehicle information will thenbe displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can be viewedin the DIC. The tire pressure will beshown in either kilopascals (kPa)or pounds per square inch (psi).Press the vehicle informationbutton until the DIC displaysFRONT TIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##. Press the vehicleinformation button again until theDIC displays REAR TIRES kPa(PSI) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure conditionis detected by the system whiledriving, a message advising youadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑43 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.

COMPASS ZONE SETTING

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See Compass on page 5‑6for more information.

COMPASS RECALIBRATION

This display will be availableif the vehicle has a compass.See Compass on page 5‑6for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this buttonto scroll through the following menuitems:

ODOMETER

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi). Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the odometer.

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”earlier in this section.

TRIPA and TRIP B

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRIPA or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time. Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will alsodisplay the trip odometers.



Each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressing theset/reset button or the trip odometerreset stem while the desired tripodometer is displayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled retroactive reset. This canbe used to set the trip odometer tothe number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retroactive reset feature,press and hold the set/reset buttonfor at least four seconds. The tripodometer will display the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) drivensince the ignition was last turned onand the vehicle was moving. Oncethe vehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before it is

started again, and then theretroactive reset feature is activated,the display will show 8 km (5miles).As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 8.2 km(5.1 miles), 8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retroactive reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.

RANGE

Press the trip/fuel button untilRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate numberof remaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is basedon an average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining in

the fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freewaydriving produces better fueleconomy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

AVG (Average) ECONOMY

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG ECONOMY displays. Thisdisplay shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number is calculatedbased on the number of L/100 km(mpg) recorded since the last timethis menu item was reset. To resetAVG ECONOMY, press and hold theset/reset button.



TIMER

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This displaycan be used as a timer.

To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will showthe amount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shownon the DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

FUEL USED

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

AVG (Average) SPEED

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVG SPEED displays. This displayshows the average speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour(km/h) or miles per hour (mph).This average is calculated basedon the various vehicle speedsrecorded since the last reset of thisvalue. To reset the value to zero,press and hold the set/reset button.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Driver Information Center(DIC) (Without DICButtons)If your vehicle does not have DICbuttons, the information belowexplains the operation of thissystem.

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed bypressing the trip odometer resetstem located on the instrumentpanel cluster. Pressing the tripodometer reset stem will also turnoff, or acknowledge, DIC messages.

The DIC displays trip and vehiclesystem information, and warningmessages if a system problem isdetected.



If your vehicle does not haveDIC buttons, you can use thetrip odometer reset stem to viewthe following displays: odometer,trip odometers, oil life, park assistmenu for vehicles with theUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) system, units, and displaylanguage.

If your vehicle has DIC buttons,you can use the trip odometer resetstem to view the following displays:odometer and trip odometers.

Trip Odometer Reset StemMenu Items

ODOMETER

Press the trip odometer resetstem until ODOMETER displays.This display shows the distance thevehicle has been driven in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “UNITS”later in this section.

TRIPA or TRIP B

Press the trip odometer reset stemuntil TRIPA or TRIP B displays.This display shows the currentdistance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi) sincethe last reset for each trip odometer.Both trip odometers can be used atthe same time.

Each trip odometer can be reset tozero separately by pressing andholding the trip odometer reset stemwhile the desired trip odometer isdisplayed.

The trip odometer has a featurecalled the retro-active reset. Thiscan be used to set the trip odometerto the number of kilometers (miles)driven since the ignition was lastturned on. This can be used if thetrip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature,press and hold the trip odometerreset stem for at least four seconds.

The trip odometer will displaythe number of kilometers (km)or miles (mi) driven since theignition was last turned on andthe vehicle was moving. Once thevehicle begins moving, the tripodometer will accumulate mileage.For example, if the vehicle wasdriven 8 km (5 miles) before itis started again, and then theretro-active reset feature isactivated, the display will show8 km (5 miles). As the vehiclebegins moving, the display willthen increase to 8.2 km (5.1 miles),8.4 km (5.2 miles), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature isactivated after the vehicle is started,but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number ofkilometers (km) or miles (mi) thatwere driven during the last ignitioncycle.



OIL LIFE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays. This displayshows an estimate of the oil'sremaining useful life. If you see99%OIL LIFE REMAINING onthe display, that means 99% ofthe current oil life remains. Theengine oil life system will alert youto change the oil on a scheduleconsistent with your drivingconditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑39. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑8. In addition tothe engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenanceis recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Remember, you must reset theOIL LIFE display yourself after eachoil change. It will not reset itself.Also, be careful not to reset theOIL LIFE display accidentally at anytime other than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

PARK ASSIST

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). If your vehiclehas the Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system, press thetrip odometer reset stem until PARKASSIST displays. This displayallows the system to be turned on oroff. Once in this display, press andhold the trip odometer reset stem toselect between ON or OFF. If youchoose ON, the system will beturned on. If you choose OFF, thesystem will be turned off. The URPA

system automatically turns back onafter each vehicle start. When theURPA system is turned off and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park), theDIC will display the PARK ASSISTOFF message as a reminder thatthe system has been turned off.See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑41 andUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑36 for more information.

UNITS

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). Press the tripodometer reset stem until UNITSdisplays. This display allows you toselect between Metric or Englishunits of measurement. Once in thisdisplay, press and hold the tripodometer reset stem to selectbetween METRIC or ENGLISHunits. All of the vehicle informationwill then be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.



DISPLAY LANGUAGE

To access this display, the vehiclemust be in P (Park). This displayallows you to select the languagein which the DIC messages willappear. To select a language:

1. Press the trip odometer resetstem until DISPLAY LANGUAGEdisplays.

2. Continue to press and holdthe trip odometer reset stem toscroll through all of the availablelanguages.

The available languages areENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS(French), ESPANOL (Spanish),and NO CHANGE.

3. Once the desired languageis displayed, release the tripodometer reset stem to setyour choice.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{ WARNING

If the HUD image is too bright ortoo high in your field of view, itmay take you more time to seethings you need to see when it isdark outside. Be sure to keep theHUD image dim and placed low inyour field of view.

For vehicles with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), some informationconcerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto thewindshield. This includes thespeedometer reading, RPM reading,transmission position, outside airtemperature, the tap shift gear,and a brief display of the currentradio station, including XM

information or CD track. It will alsodisplay turn-by-turn navigationinformation if the vehicle has anavigation radio. The images areprojected by the HUD lens locatedon the driver's side of the instrumentpanel.

The tap shift gear will also appearon the HUD if the vehicle has tapshift and it is active.

The HUD information can bedisplayed in one of three languages,English, French, or Spanish.The speedometer reading and othernumerical values can be displayedin either English or metric units.

The language selection and theunits of measurement are changedthrough the trip computer in theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization (WithDIC Buttons) on page 5‑45.



HUD Display on the VehicleWindshield

The HUD information appears as animage focused out toward the frontof the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned toON/RUN, the HUD will display anintroductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD is ready.

The following indicator lights comeon the instrument panel whenactivated and also appear onthe HUD:. Turn Signal Indicators. High-Beam Indicator Symbol

The HUD temporarily displaysCHECK GAGES and ICEPOSSIBLE when these messagesare on the DIC trip computer.

The HUD also displays the followingmessages on vehicles with thesesystems, when they are active:. TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE. STABILITRAK ACTIVE

Notice: If you try to use theHUD image as a parking aid, youmay misjudge the distance anddamage your vehicle. Do not usethe HUD image as a parking aid.

When the HUD is on, thespeedometer reading is continuallydisplayed. The current radio station

or CD track number will displayfor a short period of time after theradio or CD track status changes.This happens whenever radioinformation is changed. Thespeedometer size is reducedwhen radio, CD information,warnings, or turn-by-turn navigationinformation are displayed onthe HUD.

The HUD control is located to theright of the steering wheel.



To adjust the HUD image so thatitems are properly displayed, do thefollowing:

1. Adjust the driver's seat to acomfortable position.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjustthe HUD.

9 (Off): To turn HUD off, rotate thedimming knob fully counterclockwiseuntil the HUD display turns off.

Brightness : Turn the knobon the HUD control clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten ordim the display.

w (Up) : x (Down) : Press the upor down arrows to center the HUDimage in your view. The HUD imagecan only be adjusted up and down,not side to side.

? (Page) : Press this button toselect the display formats. Releasethe page button when the formatnumber with the desired display isshown on the HUD.

The three formats are as follows:

English

Metric

Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English ormetric units), turn signal indication,high beam indication, transmissionpositions, and the outside airtemperature.

English

Metric

Format Two: This display includesthe information in Format Onewithout the transmission informationand the outside air temperature.



English

Metric

Format Three: This displayincludes all the information inFormat One along with a circulartachometer, but without outside airtemperature.

All formats will show the turn-by-turnnavigation information and providedetails about the next drivingmaneuver to be made. When younear your destination, the HUDwill display a distance bar thatwill fill in the closer you get toyour destination. All navigationinformation is provided to theHUD by the navigation radio,if the vehicle has one.

The HUD image displayed on thewindshield will automatically dimand brighten to compensate foroutside lighting.

The HUD image can temporarilylight up depending on the angle andposition of the sunlight on the HUDdisplay. This is normal and willchange when the angle of thesunlight on the HUD displaychanges.

Polarized sunglasses could makethe HUD image harder to see.

Care of the HUD

Clean the inside of the windshieldas needed to remove any dirt or filmthat could reduce the sharpness orclarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft,clean cloth that has household glasscleaner sprayed on it. Wipe theHUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lensbecause the cleaner could leak intothe unit.



If You Cannot See the HUDImage When the Ignition Is On. Is anything covering the

HUD lens?. Is the HUD dimmer setting bright

enough?. Is the HUD image adjusted to

the proper height?. Are you wearing polarized

sunglasses?. Still no HUD image? Check the

fuse in the instrument panel fuseblock. See Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑36.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear. Is the HUD image too bright?. Are the windshield and HUD

lens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct,contact your dealer.

Keep in mind that the windshield ispart of the HUD system.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you canpress any of the DIC buttonson the instrument panel or thetrip odometer reset stem onthe instrument panel cluster toacknowledge that you receivedthe messages and to clear themfrom the display.

Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they canbe cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages willonly make the messages disappear,not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages that can be displayedand some information about them.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem detects that the batteryvoltage is dropping below expectedlevels. The battery saver systemstarts reducing certain featuresof the vehicle that you may beable to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery.

Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the batteryto recharge.

The normal battery voltage range is11.5 to 15.5 volts.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, thecharging system light may alsoturn on in the instrument panelcluster. See Charging SystemLight on page 5‑17. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart the

vehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

Cruise Control Messages

CRUISE SET TOXXX

This message displays wheneverthe cruise control is set. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver door is not fullyclosed and the vehicle is shiftedout of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

On some models, this messagedisplays and a chime sounds if thehood is not fully closed. Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the hoodfor obstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LIFTGATE OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the liftgate is open whilethe ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn offthe vehicle and check the liftgate.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.



PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop andturn off the vehicle, check the doorfor obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

POWER LIFTGATE OFF

This message displays when thepower liftgate has been turned offby pressing the power liftgate buttonon the center console.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle, checkthe door for obstructions, and closethe door again. Check to see if themessage still appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

ENGINE HOT A/C(Air Conditioning) OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑14. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. Whenthe coolant temperature returnsto normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the enginespeed above normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for more information.

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑14.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑22 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.



ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.Do not increase the enginespeed above normal idling speed.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for more information.

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil,be sure to reset the CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11 for information on howto reset the message. See EngineOil on page 10‑8 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2 formore information.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

Notice: If you drive your vehiclewhile the engine oil pressureis low, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on theinstrument panel cluster and/orDIC, stop the vehicle as soonas possible. Do not drive thevehicle until the cause of thelow oil pressure is corrected.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑8.



Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and achime sounds when the coolingsystem temperature gets too hotand the engine further enters theengine coolant protection mode.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20 for further information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's abilityto accelerate. If this messageis on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimesounds if the fuel level is low. Refuelas soon as possible. See FuelGauge on page 5‑13 and Fuel onpage 9‑42 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑18. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9‑45. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needsto be replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned off.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message displays when theautomatic headlamps are turned on.This message clears itself after10 seconds.



TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mile). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASST (Assist)BLOCKED SEE OWNERSMANUAL

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑36 formore information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,after the vehicle has been startedand shifted out of P (Park), thismessage displays to remind thedriver that the URPA system hasbeen turned off or to notify thedriver that the system has turneditself off. Press the set/reset buttonor the trip odometer reset stem toacknowledge this message andclear it from the DIC display.For more information see UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑36.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

If your vehicle has the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,this message displays if there isa problem with the URPA system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑36 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if thereis a problem with the StabiliTrak®

system. If this message appears, tryto reset the system. Stop; turn offthe engine for at least 15 seconds;then start the engine again. If thismessage still comes on, it meansthere is a problem. See your dealerfor service. The vehicle is safe todrive, however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage is displayed, the systemwill not limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑31 for more information.



TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑31 for moreinformation. This message clearsitself after 10 seconds.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned on. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑31 for more information.This message clears itself after10 seconds.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there isa problem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑16 andAirbag System on page 3‑32 formore information.

Anti-Theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑15 for moreinformation.

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if thecontent theft-deterrent system hasdetected a break-in attempt whileyou were away from your vehicle.See Anti-Theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13 for more information.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE A/C (AirConditioning) SYSTEM

This message displays when theelectronic sensors that controlthe air conditioning and heatingsystems are no longer working.Have the climate control systemserviced by your dealer if younotice a drop in heating and airconditioning efficiency.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when aproblem is detected with the powersteering system. When thismessage is displayed, you maynotice that the effort required tosteer the vehicle increases or feelsheavier, but you will still be able tosteer the vehicle. Have your vehicleserviced by your dealer immediately.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays when anon-emissions related malfunctionoccurs. Have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

STARTING DISABLEDSERVICE THROTTLE

This message displays when yourvehicle's throttle system is notfunctioning properly. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer.

Tire Messages

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

This message also displaysLEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire LoadingInformation label. See Tires onpage 10‑39, Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time.To read the other messages thatmay have been sent at the sametime, press the set/reset buttonor the trip odometer reset stem.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑25 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑29.

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part onthe TPMS is not working properly.The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑23.Several conditions may causethis message to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑49 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem withthe TPMS. See your dealer.



TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when theTire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) is re-learning the tirepositions on your vehicle. The tirepositions must be re-learned afterrotating the tires or after replacing atire or sensor. See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑53, Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑47, and TirePressure on page 10‑46 for moreinformation.

Transmission Messages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when there is a compactspare tire on the vehicle, whenthe Antilock Brake System (ABS)warning light comes on, or when therear differential fluid is overheating.This message turns off when thedifferential fluid cools.

The AWD system is disabled untilthe compact spare tire is replacedby a full-size tire. If the warningmessage is still on after putting onthe full-size tire, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again after30 seconds. If the message stayson, see your dealer right away.See All-Wheel Drive on page 9‑28for more information.

SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith this system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle after 30 seconds and checkfor the message on the DIC display.If the message is still displayed orappears again when you begindriving, the AWD system needsservice. See your dealer.

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays when thereis a problem with the transmission.See your dealer for service.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, you can damage thetransmission. This could leadto costly repairs that would notbe covered by the warranty.Do not drive your vehicle withoverheated transmission fluidor while the transmissiontemperature warning is displayed.



This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays whenthe outside air temperature iscold enough to create icy roadconditions. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

Vehicle Speed Messages

SPEED LIMITED TOXXX MPH (KM/H)

This message displays when yourvehicle speed is limited to 128 km/h(80 mph) because the vehicledetects a problem in the speedvariable assist steering system.Have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23 for more information.

VehiclePersonalization

Vehicle Personalization(With DIC Buttons)Your vehicle may havecustomization capabilitiesthat allow you to programcertain features to one preferredsetting. Customization featurescan only be programmed to onesetting on the vehicle and cannotbe programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.



The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customizationbutton to enter the featuresettings menu.

If the menu is not available,FEATURE SETTINGSAVAILABLE IN PARK willdisplay. Before entering themenu, make sure the vehicleis in P (Park).

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.



You can also change the languageby pressing the trip odometer resetstem. See “Language” under DriverInformation Center (Without DICButtons) earlier in this section formore information.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver's door will unlock when thekey is taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only thedriver's door will unlock when thevehicle is shifted into P (Park).

ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).





REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectthe type of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.

LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.





DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power doorlock switch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature towork. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice or thelock button on the RKE transmittertwice. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on whenit is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization buttonuntil EXIT LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for one minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lamps willstay on for two minutes.





APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlights turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lights will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lights will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lights will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3for more information.

NO CHANGE : No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.


CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization button untilCHIME VOLUME appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stayat the last known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

If your vehicle has this feature,it allows you to select whetheror not the outside mirror(s) willautomatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑18for more information.



Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driver'soutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger's outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver's andpassenger's outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT SEAT

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SEAT appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No automatic seatexit recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat will moveback when the key is removed fromthe ignition.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place priorto removing the key again.





MEMORY SEAT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the remote memory seat recallfeature. See Delayed Locking onpage 2‑8 for more information.

Press the customization button untilMEMORY SEAT RECALL appearson the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access thesettings for this feature. Then pressthe customization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.

ON: The driver's seat and outsidemirrors will automatically move tothe stored driving position whenthe unlock button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed. See “Relearn Remote Key”under Driver Information Center(DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑25 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)

on page 5‑29 for more informationon matching transmitters to driver IDnumbers.



FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default): Thecustomization features will be setto their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization buttonuntil FEATURE SETTINGSPRESS V TO EXIT appears in theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.



Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is shifted out of

P (Park).. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40 second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission(FCC) rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use the Universal HomeRemote with any garage dooropener that does not have the stopand reverse feature. This includesany garage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program theUniversal Home Remote. Becauseof the steps involved, it may behelpful to have another personavailable to assist you withprogramming the UniversalHome Remote.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future Universal HomeRemote programming. It is alsorecommended that upon the saleof the vehicle, the programmedUniversal Home Remote buttonsshould be erased for securitypurposes. See “Erasing UniversalHome Remote Buttons” later in thissection.



When programming a garage door,park outside of the garage. Parkdirectly in line with and facing thegarage door opener motor-heador gate motor-head. Be sure thatpeople and objects are clear of thegarage door or gate that is beingprogrammed.

It is recommended that a newbattery be installed in yourhand-held transmitter for quickerand more accurate transmissionof the radio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalHome Remote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1‐800‐355‐3515or go to www.homelink.com.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle, pressand hold down the two outsidebuttons at the same time,releasing only when theUniversal Home Remoteindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds. This step willerase the factory settings or allpreviously programmed buttons.

Do not hold down the buttons forlonger than 30 seconds and donot repeat this step to programthe remaining two UniversalHome Remote buttons.

2. Hold the end of your hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm(1 to 3 inches) away from theUniversal Home Remote buttonswhile keeping the indicatorlight in view. The hand-heldtransmitter was supplied by themanufacturer of your garagedoor opener receiver (motorhead unit).

3. At the same time, press andhold both the Universal HomeRemote button to be used tocontrol the garage door and thehand-held transmitter button.Do not release the UniversalHome Remote button or thehand-held transmitter button untilStep 4 has been completed.

Some entry gates and garagedoor openers may requiresubstitution of Step 3 withthe procedure noted in “GateOperator and CanadianProgramming” later in thissection.



4. The indicator light on theUniversal Home Remote willflash slowly at first and thenrapidly after Universal HomeRemote successfully receivesthe frequency signal from thehand-held transmitter. Releaseboth buttons.

5. Press and hold the newly-trainedUniversal Home Remote buttonand observe the indicator light.. If the indicator light stays

on continuously, theprogramming is completeand the garage door shouldmove when the UniversalHome Remote button ispressed and released.There is no need tocontinue programmingSteps 6 through 8.

. If the Universal HomeRemote indicatorlight blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and thenturns to a constant light,

continue with theprogramming Steps 6through 8.

It may be helpful to haveanother person assist withthe remaining steps.

6. After Steps 1 through 5 havebeen completed, locate insidethe garage the garage dooropener receiver (motor-headunit). Locate the “Learn” or“Smart” button. The name andcolor of the button may vary bymanufacturer.

7. Firmly press and release the“Learn” or “Smart” button. Afteryou press this button, you willhave 30 seconds to completeStep 8.

8. Immediately return to thevehicle. Firmly press and holdthe Universal Home Remotebutton, selected in Step 3 tocontrol the garage door, fortwo seconds, and then releaseit. If the garage door doesnot move, press and hold thesame button a second timefor two seconds, and thenrelease it. Again, if the doordoes not move, press and holdthe same button a third time fortwo seconds, and then release.

The Universal Home Remoteshould now activate thegarage door.



To program the remaining twoUniversal Home Remote buttons,begin with Step 2 of “Programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem.” Do not repeat Step 1,as this will erase all previousprogramming from the UniversalHome Remote buttons.

Gate Operator and CanadianProgramming

If you have questions or needhelp programming the UniversalHome Remote System, call1-800-355-3515 or go towww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency lawsrequire transmitter signals to timeout or quit after several secondsof transmission. This may not belong enough for Universal HomeRemote to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similarly, some U.S.gate operators are manufactured totime out in the same manner.

If you live in Canada, or you arehaving difficulty programming agate operator or garage dooropener by using the “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote”procedures, regardless of whereyou live, replace Step 3 under“Programming Universal HomeRemote” with the following:

Continue to press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonwhile you press and releaseevery two seconds (cycle) thehand-held transmitter buttonuntil the frequency signal hasbeen successfully accepted bythe Universal Home Remote.The Universal Home Remoteindicator light will flash slowlyat first and then rapidly. Proceedwith Step 4 under “ProgrammingUniversal Home Remote” tocomplete the training procedure.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using Universal Remote

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote button for at leasthalf of a second. The indicator lightwill come on while the signal isbeing transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteButtons

All programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.



To erase all programmed buttons onthe Universal Remote device:

1. Press and hold down thetwo outside buttons until theindicator light begins to flash,after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote Button

To reprogram any of the threeUniversal Remote buttons, repeatthe programming instructions earlierin this section, beginning withStep 2.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices on page 13‑5.



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-7Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Battery Load Management . . . . 6-7Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-8

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.


6-2 Lighting

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thefollowing lamps listed below.A warning chime sounds if thedriver's door is opened whenthe ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

# (Fog Lamps): Turns on the foglamps (if equipped).

See Fog Lamps on page 6‑5.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever towards you to returnto low beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh beam headlamps are on.


Lighting 6-3

Flash-to-PassThis feature is used to signal tothe vehicle ahead that you wantto pass.

If the headlamps are off or inthe low‐beam position, pull theturn signal lever toward you tomomentarily switch to high‐beams.

Release the lever to turn thehigh-beam headlamps off.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)/AutomaticHeadlamp SystemDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system makes eitherthe low-beam headlamps comeon at a reduced brightness orthe DRL lights, for vehicles withHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)headlamps when the followingconditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/RUN

position.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, the regularheadlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,and other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel and clusterwill also not be lit.

For vehicles with HID headlamps,if the DRL are on and the left orright turn signal lamp is turned on,the left or right DRL will go off.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will go off and theDRL will come on.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel because itworks with the DRL.


6-4 Lighting

Hazard Warning Flashers| Hazard Warning Flasher:Press this button located on theinstrument panel below the audiosystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press again to turnthe flashers off.

The turn signals do not work whilethe hazard warning flashers are on.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is completed. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmight be burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers onpage 10‑33.

Turn Signal On Chime

If either one of the turn signals areleft on and the vehicle has beendriven more than 1.2 km (3/4 mile),a chime will sound.


Lighting 6-5

Fog LampsUse the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

The fog lamps button is on theexterior lamps control to the leftof the steering column.

# (Fog Lamps): Press the exteriorlamps button to turn the fog lampson or off. A light comes on in theinstrument panel cluster when thefog lamps are in use. The ignitionmust be on for the fog lampsto work.

When the headlamps are changedto high-beam, the fog lamps turn off.The fog lamps come back on againwhen the high-beam headlamps areturned off.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlD (Instrument PanelBrightness): The knob with thissymbol on it is next to the exteriorlamps control to the left of thesteering wheel. Push the knobin all the way until it extends outand then turn the knob clockwiseor counterclockwise to brighten ordim the lights. Push the knob backin when finished.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps automaticallycome on when a door is opened.The lamps can also be turnedon manually by fully turning theinstrument panel brightness controlclockwise.

The reading lamps, located on theheadliner above the rearview mirror,can be turned on or off independentof the automatic courtesy lamps,when the doors are closed.

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console and above therear seat passengers.

The dome lamps come on when adoor is opened, unless the domelamp override button is pressed in.

The lamps can also be turned onand off by turning the instrumentpanel brightness control clockwiseto the farthest position.


6-6 Lighting

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button isnext to the exterior lamps control.

E (Dome Lamp Override): Pressthe button in and the dome lampsremain off when a door is opened.Press the button again to theextended position so the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsPress the button near each lamp toturn them on or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingFor vehicles with courtesy lamps,they come on and stay on for a settime whenever the unlock symbolis pressed on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter, if thevehicle has one.

If a door is opened, the lamps stayon while it is open and then turnoff automatically about 20 secondsafter the door is closed. If the unlocksymbol is pressed and no door isopened, the lamps turn off afterabout 20 seconds.

Entry lighting includes a featurecalled theater dimming. With theaterdimming, the lamps do not turnoff at the end of the delay time.Instead, they slowly dim and thengo out. The delay time is canceledif the ignition key is turned toON/RUN or the power door lockswitch is pressed. The lamps willdim right away.

When the ignition is on, illuminatedentry is inactive, which means thecourtesy lamps will not come onunless a door is opened.

Delayed Entry LightingDelayed entry lighting illuminatesthe interior for a period of time afterall the doors have been closed.

The ignition must be off for delayedentry lighting to work. Immediatelyafter all the doors have been closed,the delayed entry lighting featurecontinues to work until one of thefollowing occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The doors are locked.. An illumination period of about

25 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period is canceled andthe interior lamps remain on.


Lighting 6-7

Delayed Exit LightingDelayed exit lighting illuminates theinterior for a period of time after thekey is removed from the ignition.

The ignition must be off for delayedexit lighting to work. When the keyis removed, interior illuminationactivates and remains on until oneof the following occurs:. The ignition is in ON/RUN.. The power door locks are

activated.. An illumination period of

20 seconds has elapsed.

If during the illumination perioda door is opened, the timedillumination period will be canceledand the interior lamps will remain onbecause a door is open.

Parade DimmingThis feature automatically prohibitsthe dimming of the instrumentpanel displays in daylight whilethe headlamps are on so that thedisplays are still able to be seen.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see the

voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produce allthe power that is needed for veryhigh electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.


6-8 Lighting

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speedto generate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑25 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑29.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature helps prevent thebattery from being drained, if theinterior courtesy lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps ortrunk lamp are accidentally left on.If any of these lamps are left on,they automatically turn off after10 minutes, if the ignition is off.The lamps will not come back onagain until one of the followingoccurs:. The ignition is turned on.. The exterior lamps control is

turned off, then on again.

The headlamps will timeout after10 minutes, if they are manuallyturned on while the ignition is onor off.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16MP3 (Radio with CD andRadio with CD/USB) . . . . . . . 7-24

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) . . . 7-30Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Rear AudioController (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

IntroductionRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting ininjury or death to you or others.Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.


7-2 Infotainment System

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑2.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑19 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate NavigationSystem manual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.

Operation

Radio with CD, Radio with CD/USB similar



Radio with CD, DVD, and USB

The vehicle may have one of theseradios as its audio system.

Radios with CD, DVD, and USB

Radios with CD, DVD, and USBhave a Bose® Surround SoundSystem. Some of its featuresare explained later in this sectionunder, “Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)”.

If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) system, it hasa CD, DVD, and USB radio. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑38 for moreinformation on the vehicle's RSEsystem.

The DVD player is the top slot onthe radio faceplate. The playeris capable of reading the DTSprogrammed DVD Audio or DVDVideo media. DTS and DTS DigitalSurround are registered trademarksof Digital Theater Systems, Inc..

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.



Playing the Radio

O (Power/Volume): Press to turnthe system on and off. Turn toincrease or decrease the volume.

For vehicles with a RearEntertainment System (RSE),press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off the entireradio and RSE system and tostart the parental control feature.Parental control prevents the rearseat occupant from operating theRear Seat Audio (RSA) system orremote control.

A lock symbol displays next to theclock display while the parentalcontrol feature is being used.The feature remains on until O ispressed and held for more thantwo seconds, or the driver turns theignition off and exits the vehicle.

4 (Information): Press to switchthe display between the radiostation frequency and the time.When the ignition is in the OFFposition, press 4 to display the time.For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMAor RDS features, press 4 to displayadditional text information relatedto the current FM-RDS or XMstation; or CD, MP3 or WMA song.If information is available duringXM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback,the song title information displayson the top line of the display andartist information displays on thebottom line. When information is notavailable, “NO INFO” is displayed.

Auto Text (Satellite Radio Service,CD, MP3, and WMA features): Ifadditional information is availablefor the current song being played,Auto Text will automaticallypage/scroll the information everyfive seconds above the FAV presetson the radio display.

To activate Auto Text:

1. Press MENU to display the radiosetup menu.

2. Press the softkey underAUTO TXT tab on the radiodisplay.

3. Press the softkey under the ONtab on the radio display.

If 4 is pressed and the song titleor artist information is longer thanwhat can be displayed, the extrainformation will page everyfive seconds when Auto Text isactivated.



Speed Compensated Volume(SCV): The Speed CompensatedVolume (SCV) feature automaticallyadjusts the radio volume tocompensate for road and windnoise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

To activate SCV:

1. Set the radio volume.

2. Press the MENU button todisplay the radio setup menu.

3. Press the softkey under theAUTO VOLUM (automaticvolume) tab on the radio display.

4. Press the softkey under theSpeed Compensated Volumesetting (OFF, Low, Med, orHigh) to select the level of radiovolume compensation. Pressthe softkey located below theBACK tab on the MENU SETUPdisplay or let the display time outafter approximately 10 seconds.

Each higher setting allowsfor more radio volumecompensation at fastervehicle speeds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange,or Treble): To adjust bass,midrange, or treble:

1. Press f until the tone controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained.

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD, ors REV.

If a station's frequency is weak or ifthere is static, decrease the treble.

To quickly adjust bass, midrange,or treble to the middle position,press the softkey under the BASS,MID, or TREB tab for more thantwo seconds. A beep sounds andthe level adjusts to the middleposition.

To quickly adjust all tone andspeaker controls to the middleposition, press f for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds.

EQ (Equalization): Press tochoose bass and treble equalizationsettings designed for different typesof music. The choices are pop, rock,country, talk, jazz, and classical.Selecting MANUAL or changingbass or treble, returns the EQ to themanual bass and treble settings.

Unique EQ settings can be savedfor each source.

If the radio has a Bose® audiosystem, the EQ settings are eitherMANUAL or TALK.



Adjusting the Speakers(Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade):To adjust the balance or fade:

1. Press f until the speaker controltabs display.

2. Continue pressing f to highlightthe tab, or press the softkeyunder the tab.

3. To adjust the highlighted setting,do one of the following until thelevels are obtained.

. Turn f clockwise orcounterclockwise.

. Press\ FWD, ors REV.

To quickly adjust balance or fadeto the middle position, press thesoftkey under the BAL or FADE tabfor more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to themiddle position.

To quickly adjust all speaker andtone controls to the middle position,press f for more than two secondsuntil a beep sounds.

Radios with CD and DVD fadedifferently depending on the DVDMedia type:. With DVD‐A 5.1 Surround

media, the left front and rightfront speakers fade rearward,leaving the center front speakersunaffected until the lastfade step, then all frontspeakers mute.

. With DVD‐V 5.1 Surroundmedia, surround sound ismaintained until Step 4 of theFade control is reached whilefading rearward. At that pointthe audio system outputchanges to Stereo to preventthe loss of Center channeloutput when the full rearwardfade position is reached.

If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) isturned on, the radio disables FADEand mutes the rear speakers.

Radio Messages

Calibration Error: The audiosystem has been calibratedfor the vehicle from the factory.If Calibration Error displays, itmeans that the radio has not beenconfigured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to yourdealer for service.

Locked: This message displayswhen the THEFTLOCK® systemhas locked up the radio. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)

The Radio Data System (RDS)feature is available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This system relies uponreceiving specific information fromthese stations and only works whenthe information is available. Whilethe radio is tuned to an FM-RDSstation, the station name or callletters display. In rare cases, a radiostation could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radiofeatures to work improperly. If thishappens, contact the radio station.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press andhold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmedas favorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.



The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.

To setup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio servicethat is based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM Satellite Radiohas a wide variety of programmingand commercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is requiredto receive the XM service. If XMService needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew” on channel XM1.For more information, contactXM at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.



Finding a Station

BAND: Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM. The selectiondisplays.

f (Tune): Turn to select radiostations.

© SEEK ¨ : Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there.

To scan stations, press andhold © or ¨ until a beep sounds.The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

The radio only seeks and scansstations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

Finding a Category (CAT)Station

CAT (Category): The CAT button isused to find XM™ stations when theradio is in the XM mode. To find XMchannels within a desired category:

1. Press BAND until the XMfrequency displays.

2. Press CAT to display thecategory tabs.

3. Continue pressing CAT until thedesired category name displays.. Radios with CD and DVD

can also navigate thecategory list by pressings REV or\ FWD.

4. Press either of the two buttonsbelow the desired category tabto immediately tune to the firstXM station associated with thatcategory.

5. To go to the next or previousXM station within the selectedcategory, do one of thefollowing:

. Turn f.

. Press the buttons below theright or left arrows on thedisplay.

. Press either SEEK arrow.

6. To exit the category searchmode, press the FAV button orBAND button to display thefavorites again.



Undesired XM categories can beremoved through the setup menu.To remove an undesired category,perform the following:


2. Press the softkey below theXM CAT tab.

3. Turn f to display the category tobe removed.

4. Press the softkey under theRemove tab until the categoryname along with the wordRemoved displays.

5. Repeat the steps to removemore categories.

Removed categories can berestored by pressing the softkeyunder the Add tab when a removedcategory is displayed or by pressingthe softkey under the RestoreAll tab.

Categories cannot be removed oradded while the vehicle is movingfaster than 8 km/h (5 mph).

Storing a Radio Station as aFavorite

Drivers are encouraged to set uptheir radio station favorites whilethe vehicle is in P (Park). Tune tofavorite stations using the presets,favorites button, and steering wheelcontrols. See Steering WheelControls on page 5‑2.

FAV (Favorites): A maximum of36 stations can be programmedas favorites using the six softkeysbelow the radio station frequencytabs and by using the radio favoritespage button (FAV button). Pressto go through up to six pages offavorites, each having six favoritestations available per page. Eachpage of favorites can contain anycombination of AM, FM, or XMstations.

The balance/fade and tone settingsthat were previously adjusted, arestored with the favorite stations.

To store a station as a favorite:

1. Tune to the desired radio station.

2. Press FAV to display the page tostore the station.

3. Press and hold one of thesix softkeys until a beep sounds.When that softkey is pressedand released, the station thatwas set, returns.

4. Repeat the steps for each radiostation to be stored as a favorite.



To setup the number of favoritespages:


2. Press the softkey below theFAV 1-6 tab.

3. Select the desired number offavorites pages by pressing thesoftkey below the displayedpage numbers.

4. Press FAV, or let the menutime out, to return to the originalmain radio screen showing theradio station frequency tabsand to begin the process ofprogramming favorites for thechosen amount of numberedpages.

XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels,or any others, can be blocked ata customer's request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

No XM Signal: The system isfunctioning correctly, but the vehicleis in a location that is blocking theXM™ signal. When the vehicle ismoved into an open area, the signalshould return.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth : This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned. Tune to another station.If this station was one of thepresets, choose another stationfor that preset button.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel. The systemis working properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel. The system isworking properly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel. The system is workingproperly.



No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receiverin the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after havingthe vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receivr: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivercould have a fault. Consult withyour dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 miles). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interferewith each other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.



XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception fromcoast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada.Just as with FM, tall buildings orhills can interfere with satellite radiosignals, causing the sound to fadein and out. In addition, travelingor standing under heavy foliage,bridges, garages, or tunnels maycause loss of the XM signal for aperiod of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on.This interference can cause anincreased level of static whilelistening to the radio. If static isreceived while listening to theradio, unplug the cellular phoneand turn it off.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is locatedon the roof of the vehicle. This typeof antenna is used with the AM/FMradio, as well as OnStar® and theXM™ Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, if the vehicle has thesefeatures. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clearradio reception. If the vehicle hasa sunroof, the performance of theradio system may be affected if thesunroof is open. Loading items ontothe roof of the vehicle can interferewith the performance of the radiosystem and, if the vehicle has thisfeature, OnStar®. Make sure themulti-band antenna is notobstructed.

Audio Players

CD Player

Playing a CD

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing.

Z EJECT : Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Oncethe disc is ejected, RemoveDisc displays. The disc can beremoved. If the disc is not removed,after several seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.



© SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to thestart of the current track, if morethan ten seconds on the CD haveplayed. Press ¨ to go to the nexttrack.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playback quicklywithin a track. Sound will be heardat a reduced volume. Release toresume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.

RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM label untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turn offrandom play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The CDremains inside the radio for futurelistening.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

Care of CDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If thesurface of a CD is damaged, suchas cracked, broken, or scratched,the CD does not play properly or notat all. Do not touch the bottom sideof a CD while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up CDsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.



Care of the CD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD player.If a CD is recorded on a personalcomputer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of therecorded CD with a marking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added toa CD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD and Radio with CD/USB)on page 7‑24 or MP3 (Radio withCD/DVD) on page 7‑30.

CD Messages

CHECK DISC: Radios with aSingle CD player display CHECKDISC and/or ejects the CD if anerror occurs.

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.



CD/DVD Player

Playing a CD (In Either theDVD or CD Slot)

Insert a CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls it inand the CD should begin playing(loading a disc into the system,depending on media type andformat ranges from 5 to 20 secondsfor a CD, and up to 30 seconds fora DVD to begin playing).

If the ignition or radio is turned off,while a CD is in the player, it staysin the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.The CD is controlled by the buttonson the radio faceplate or by the RSAunit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System on page 7‑47 for moreinformation. The DVD/CD decks,(upper slot is the DVD deck and thelower slot is the CD deck) of theradio are compatible with mostaudio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, andMP3/WMAs.

When a CD is inserted, the textlabel DVD or CD symbol displayson the left side of the radio display.As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

Z CD (Eject): Press and releaseto eject the disc that is currentlyplaying. The disc ejects from thebottom slot. A beep sounds andEjecting Disc displays. Once thedisc is ejected, Remove Discdisplays. The disc can be removed.If the disc is not removed, afterseveral seconds, the discautomatically pulls back into theplayer.

Z DVD (Eject): Press andrelease to eject the disc that iscurrently playing in the top slot.A beep sounds and Ejecting Discdisplays.

If loading and reading of a disccannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdZ DVD for more than five secondsto force the disc to eject.

f (Tune): Turn to select tracks onthe CD that is currently playing.

© SEEK ¨ : Press © to go to thestart of the current track if the trackhas played more than five seconds.If the track has played less thanfive seconds the previous trackwill play.

Press ¨ to go to the next track.

If either arrow is held, or pressedmultiple times, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the tracks on the CD.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressand hold to reverse playbackquickly within a track. Sound will beheard at a reduced volume. Releaseto resume playing the track. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly within a track. Sound willbe heard at a reduced volume.Release to resume playing thetrack. The elapsed time of thetrack displays.



RDM (Random): CD tracks can belistened to in random, rather thansequential order with the randomsetting. To use random, press thesoftkey under the RDM tab untilRandom Current Disc displays.Press the softkey again to turnoff random play.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a CD or DVD is playing.The CD or DVD remains insidethe radio for future listening orfor viewing entertainment.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Pressto select between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

. If a front auxiliary input device isconnected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑38 for moreinformation.

Care of CDs and DVDs

If playing a CD-R, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to CD-R orCD-RW quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the musicthat has been recorded, and theway the CD-R or CD-RW has beenhandled. Handle them carefully.Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in theiroriginal cases or other protectivecases and away from direct sunlightand dust. The CD or DVD playerscans the bottom surface of thedisc. If the surface of a CD isdamaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not playproperly or not at all. Do not touchthe bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage thesurface. Pick up CDs by graspingthe outer edges or the edge of thehole and the outer edge.



If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen aclean, soft cloth in a mild, neutraldetergent solution mixed with water,and clean it. Make sure the wipingprocess starts from the center tothe edge.

Care of the CD and DVD Player

Do not add any label to a CD, itcould get caught in the CD or DVDplayer. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a descriptionlabel is needed, try labeling thetop of the recorded CD with amarking pen.

The use of CD lens cleaners forCDs is not advised.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, or more than one CD isinserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to playscratched or damaged CDs, theCD player could be damaged.While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD ata time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

If an error displays, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

Radios with CD and DVDAudio Output

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the speakers at one time.An audio source is defined asDVD slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM,Front Auxiliary Jack, or RearAuxiliary Jack.

PressO to turn the radio on.The radio can be heard throughall of the vehicle speakers.

Front seat passengers can listento the radio (AM, FM, or XM) bypressing BAND or DVD/CD AUX toselect the CD slot, DVD slot, frontor rear auxiliary input (if available).



If a playback device is plugged intothe radio’s front auxiliary input jackor the rear auxiliary jack, the frontseat passengers are able to listen toplayback from this source throughthe vehicle speakers. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” laterin this section, or “Audio/Video(A/V) Jacks” under, Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑38 for more information.

In some vehicles, depending onaudio options, the rear speakerscan be muted when the RSA poweris turned on. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑47 formore information.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW Disc

The radio has the capability ofplaying an MP3/WMA CD-R orCD-RW disc. For more informationon how to play an MP3/WMA CD-Ror CD-RW disc, see MP3 (Radiowith CD and Radio with CD/USB)on page 7‑24 or MP3 (Radio withCD/DVD) on page 7‑30.

CD Messages

Optical Error: The disc wasinserted upside down.

Disk Read Error: A disc wasinserted with an invalid or unknownformat.

Player Error: There are disc LOADor disc EJECT problems.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. The road is very rough. Whenthe road becomes smoother, theCD should play.

. The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There could have been aproblem while burning the CD.

. The label could be caught in theCD player.

If the CD is not playing correctlyfor any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly orif an error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write itdown and provide it to your dealerwhen reporting the problem.



Using the DVD Player

The DVD player can be controlledby the buttons on the remotecontrol, the RSA system, or bythe buttons on the radio faceplate.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑38 and Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑47 formore information.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The DVD slot of the radio iscompatible with most audio CDs,CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW,DVD+R/RW media alongwith MP3 and WMA formats.

If an error message displays onthe video screen or the radio, see“DVD Display Error Messages”under, Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System on page 7‑38 and“DVD Radio Error Messages” in thissection for more information.

Playing a DVD

f (Tune): Turn to change tracks ona CD or DVD, to manually tune aradio station, or to change clockor date settings, while in the clockor date setting mode. See theinformation given earlier in thissection specific to the radio, CD,and the DVD. Also, see “Settingthe Clock” in the index, for settingthe clock and date.

© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press © again to go to the previoustrack or chapter. This button maynot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter):Press to go to the next track orchapter. This button may not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

s REV (Fast Reverse): Pressto quickly reverse the DVD atfive times the normal speed.The radio displays the elapsedtime while in fast reverse. To stopfast reversing, press again. Thisbutton may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright informationor the previews.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the DVD. The radiodisplays the elapsed time and fastforwards five times the normalspeed. To stop fast forwarding,press again. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.



Z (Eject): Press to eject a DVD.If the DVD is ejected, but notremoved, the player automaticallypulls it back in after 15 seconds.

If loading and reading of a DVDcannot be completed, because ofan unknown format, etc., and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdfor more than five seconds to forcethe disc to eject.

DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

The rear seat passenger cannavigate the DVD-V menus andcontrols through the remote control.See “Remote Control”, under RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) Systemon page 7‑38 for more information.The Video Screen automaticallyturns on when the DVD-V isinserted into the DVD slot.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing

on display, the system is inpause mode.

. If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

. If the DVD screen is off, pressthe play button to turn thescreen on.

Some DVDs begin playing afterthe previews have finished,although there could be a delayof up to 30 seconds. If the DVDdoes not begin playing the movieautomatically, press the softkeyunder the play/pause icon displayedon the radio. If the DVD still doesnot play, refer to the on-screeninstructions, if available.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.

r (Enter): Press to select thechoices that are highlighted inany menu.

y (Menu): Press to access theDVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thesoftkeys under the navigationarrows to navigate the cursorthrough the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press thisbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when a DVD isplaying and a menu is active.



DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons

Once a DVD-A is inserted, the radiodisplay menu shows several icons.Press the softkeys under any iconduring DVD playback. See the iconlist below for more information.

The rear seat operator can navigatethe DVD-A menus and controlsthrough the remote control.See “Remote Control”, underRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑38 for moreinformation. The Video Screen doesnot automatically power on whenthe DVD-A is inserted into the DVDslot. It must be manually turned onby the rear seat occupant throughthe remote control power button.

r / j (Play/Pause): Press eitherthe play or pause icon displayed onthe radio system, to toggle betweenpausing or restarting playback ofa DVD.. If the forward arrow is showing

on display, the system is inpause mode.

. If the pause icon is showingon display, the system is inplayback mode.

q Groupr : Press to cyclethrough musical groupings on theDVD-A disc.

Nav (Navigate): Press to displaydirectional arrows for navigatingthrough the menus.

e (Audio Stream): Press tocycle through audio stream formatslocated on the DVD-A disc.The video screen shows theaudio stream changing.

Inserting a Disc

To play a disc, gently insert thedisc, with the label side up, into theloading slot. The DVD player mightnot accept some paper labeledmedia. The player starts loading thedisc into the system and shows“Loading Disc” on the radio display.At the same time, the radio displaysa softkey menu of option(s). Somediscs automatically play the moviewhile others default to the softkeymenu display, which requires thePlay, Enter, or Navigation softkeysto be pressed; either by the softkeyon the radio or by the rear seatpassenger using the remote control.

It may take up to 30 seconds for aDVD to begin playing.



Stopping and Resuming Playback

To stop playing a DVD withoutturning off the system, do oneof the following:

. Pressc on the remote control.

. Press the softkey under thestop or the play/pause iconsdisplayed on the radio.

. If the radio head is sourced tosomething other than DVD-V,press the DVD/CD AUX buttonto make DVD-V the activesource.

To resume DVD playback, do one ofthe following:

. Pressr / j on the remotecontrol.

. Press the softkey under theplay/pause icon displayed onthe radio.

The DVD should resume play fromwhere it last stopped if the dischas not been ejected and the stopbutton has not been pressed twiceon the remote control. If the dischas been ejected or the stop buttonhas been pressed twice on theremote control, the disc resumesplaying at the beginning of the disc.

Ejecting a Disc

PressZ DVD on the radio to ejectthe disc. If a disc is ejected from theradio, but not removed, the radioreloads the disc after a short periodof time. The disc is stored in theradio. The radio does not resumeplay of the disc automatically. If themovie is reloaded and the RSAsystem is sourced to the DVD,the player begins to play again.If loading and reading a DVD orCD cannot be completed, and thedisc fails to eject, press and holdZ DVD for more than five secondsto force the disc to eject.

DVD Error Messages

Player Error: This messagedisplays when there are discload or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays, if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays, if no disc is present whenZ DVD or DVD/CD AUX ispressed on the radio.



MP3 (Radio with CD andRadio with CD/USB)

Format

Radios that have the capabilityof playing MP3s can play .mp3or .wma files that were recordedonto a CD-R or CD-RW disc.The files can be recorded with thefollowing fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps,256 kbps, and 320 kbps or avariable bit rate.

Radios that have a USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod®.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio can play discs thatcontain both uncompressed CDaudio and MP3/WMA files. If bothformats are on the disc, the radioplays both file formats in the orderin which they were recorded tothe disc.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The radio supports:. Up to 50 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 512 files and folders.. Playlists with an .m3u

or .wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma,

or .cda file extension.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays on theradio as the CD label.



If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audioand MP3/WMA files, a folderunder the root directory calledCD accesses all of the CD audiotracks on the disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists (Px).. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.

Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track

in the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or.pls file extension and are stored ona USB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.



Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press and hold orpress multiple times to continuemoving backward through tracks.

¨ SEEK: Press to go to the nexttrack. Press and hold or pressmultiple times to continue movingforward through tracks.

s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on thedisc can be listened to in random,rather than sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Discdisplays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sortthe files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing whileit is scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist inalphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.



The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songsfrom that album have played, theplayer moves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dock

connector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console. If the vehicle is onand the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display.The iPod music appears on theradio’s display and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power fromthe vehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod using theradio buttons and knobs and displaysong information on the radio’sdisplay.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume.Releases REV to resume playing.The elapsed time of the filedisplays.



\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.

Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track.The tab appears raised when pauseis being used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder onthe USB drive. To browse andselect files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.

5. Press f to select the file to beplayed.

To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.

. Third softkey, 5% through the listeach time the softkey is pressed.

. Fourth softkey, 10% through thelist each time the softkey ispressed.

. Fifth softkey, end of the list.



h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.


To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through

the list each time the softkey ispressed.




Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.



Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,< or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.

MP3 (Radio with CD/DVD)

Format

The radio can play .mp3 or .wmafiles that were recorded onto aCD-R or CD-RW disc.

The USB port canplay .mp3 and .wma files that arestored on a USB storage device aswell as AAC files that are stored onan iPod®.

Compressed Audio or Mixed ModeDiscs

The radio plays discs that containboth uncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files depending on whichslot the disc is loaded into.

The DVD Player only readsuncompressed audio and ignoresMP3/WMA files on a mixedmode disc.

The CD Player reads bothuncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc.Uncompressed audio is playedbefore MP3/WMA files. Press theCAT (category) button to togglebetween uncompressed audioand MP3/WMA files.

CD‐R or CD‐RW Supported Fileand Folder Structure

The DVD Player supports:. Up to 255 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 15 playlists.. Up to 40 sessions.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.



The CD Player supports:. Up to 512 files and folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Playlists with an .m3u or

.wpl extension.. Files with an .mp3, .wma, or

.cda file extension.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The radio supports:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32

Root Directory

The root directory of the disc istreated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audiofiles, the directory displays asF1 ROOT on the radio.

If a disc contains bothuncompressed CD audio andMP3/WMA files, a folder under theroot directory called CD accessesall of the CD audio tracks onthe disc.

Empty Folder

Folders that do not contain files areskipped, and the player advances tothe next folder that contains files.

No Folder

When the disc contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder.The next and previous folder

function does not function ona disc that was recorded withoutfolders or playlists. When displayingthe name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the disc contains onlyplaylists and compressed audiofiles, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder.The folder down and the folder upbuttons search playlists first andthen goes to the root folder. Whenthe radio displays the name of thefolder the radio displays ROOT.

Order of Play

Compressed audio files areaccessed in the following order:. Playlists.. Files stored in the root directory.. Files stored in folders in the root

directory.



Tracks are played in the followingorder:. Play begins from the first track in

the first playlist and continuessequentially through all tracksin each playlist. When the lasttrack of the last playlist hasplayed, play continues from thefirst track of the first playlist.

. Play begins from the first trackin the first folder and continuessequentially through all tracks ineach folder. When the last trackof the last folder has played,play continues from the firsttrack of the first folder.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name unless thefolder mode has been chosen asthe default display. The new trackname displays.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. Parts of words on thelast page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed Playlists

Preprogrammed playlists thatwere created using WinAmp™,MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however,they cannot be edited using theradio. These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Playlists that have an .m3u or .plsfile extension and are stored on aUSB device may be supported bythe radio with a USB port.

Playing an MP3/WMA FileFrom a Disc (In Either the DVDor CD Slot)

If a disc is inserted into the top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to navigate the CD(tracks only).

f (Tune): Turn to select MP3/WMAfiles.

© SEEK: Press to go to the start ofthe track, if more than five secondshave played. Press to go tothe previous track if less thanfive seconds have played. Pressand hold or press multiple timesto continue moving backwardthrough tracks.




s REV (Reverse): Press and holdto reverse playback quickly. Soundis heard at a reduced volume andthe elapsed time of the file displays.Releases REV to resume playing.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume and the elapsed time of thefile displays. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

Sc (Previous Folder): Pressthe softkey below Sc to go to thefirst track in the previous folder.

c T (Next Folder): Press thesoftkey belowc T to go to the firsttrack in the next folder.

RDM (Random): Files on the disccan be listened to in random, ratherthan sequential order. To userandom, press the softkey under theRDM tab until Random Current Disc

displays to play songs in randomorder. Press the same softkey againto turn off random play.

h (Music Navigator): Press thesoftkey belowh to play files inorder by artist or album.

The player scans the disc to sortthe files by artist and album ID3 taginformation. It can take severalminutes to scan the disc dependingon the number of files on the disc.The radio may begin playing while itis scanning in the background.

When the scan is finished, the discbegins playing files in order byartist. The current artist playing isshown on the second line of thedisplay. Once all songs by that artistare played, the player moves to thenext artist in alphabetical order andbegins playing files by that artist.

To listen to files by another artist,press the softkey located beloweither arrow tab. The disc goesto the next or previous artist in

alphabetical order. Continuepressing either softkey below thearrow tab until the artist displays.

To change from playback by artist toplayback by album:

1. Press the softkey located belowthe Sort By tab.

2. Press one of the softkeys belowthe album tab from the sortscreen.

3. Press the softkey below theback tab to return to the mainmusic navigator screen.

The album name displays on thesecond line between the arrowsand songs from the current albumbegins to play. Once all songs fromthat album have played, the playermoves to the next album inalphabetical order on the CD andbegins playing MP3 files from thatalbum.

To exit music navigator mode, pressthe softkey below the Back tab toreturn to normal MP3 playback.



Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port can be used tocontrol an iPod or a USB storagedevice.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated in the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port located in thecenter console. If the vehicle ison and the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPod

automatically powers off and willnot charge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

If you have an older iPod model thatis not supported, it can still be usedby connecting it to the AuxiliaryInput Jack using a standard 3.5 mm(1/8 in) stereo cable. See “Using theAuxiliary Input Jack” earlier for moreinformation.

Using the Radio to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The radio can control a USBstorage device or an iPod usingthe radio buttons and knobs anddisplay song information on theradio’s display.

f (Tune): Turn to select files.



s REV (Reverse): Press andhold to reverse playback quickly.Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Releases REV to resumeplaying. The elapsed time of the filedisplays.

\ FWD (Fast Forward): Pressand hold to advance playbackquickly. Sound is heard at a reducedvolume. Release\ FWD toresume playing. The elapsed timeof the file displays.

4 (Information): Press to displayadditional information about theselected track.



Using Softkeys to Control aUSB Storage Device or iPod

The five softkeys below the radiodisplay are used to control thefunctions listed below.

To use the softkeys:

1. Press the first or fifth softkeybelow the radio display todisplay the functions listedbelow, or press the softkeybelow the function if it iscurrently displayed.

2. Press the softkey below the tabwith the function on it to use thatfunction.

j (Pause): Press the softkeybelow j to pause the track.The tab appears raised when pauseis being used. Press the softkeybelow j again to resume playback.

Back: Press the softkey below theback tab to go back to the maindisplay screen on an iPod, or theroot directory on a USB storagedevice.

c (Folder View): Press thesoftkey belowc to view thecontents of the current folder onthe USB drive. To browse andselect files:

1. Press the softkey belowc.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof folders.

3. Press f to select the folder.If there is more than one folder,repeat Steps 1 and 2 until thefolder is reached.

4. Turn f to scroll through the filesin the selected folder.


To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through the

list each time the softkey ispressed.






h (Music Navigator): Pressthe softkey belowh to view andselect a file on an iPod, using theiPod's menu system. Files aresorted by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Genres. Songs. Composers

To select files:

1. Press the softkey belowh.

2. Turn f to scroll through the listof menus.

3. Press f to select the menu.

4. Turn f to scroll throughthe folders or files in theselected menu.


To skip through large lists, the fivesoftkeys can be used to navigate inthe following order:. First softkey, first item in the list.. Second softkey, 1% through

the list each time the softkey ispressed.


. Fourth softkey, 10% throughthe list each time the softkeyis pressed.


Repeat Functionality

To use Repeat:

Press the softkey below" or'to select between Repeat All andRepeat Track.

" (Repeat All): Press the softkeybelow" to repeat all tracks. Thetab appears lowered when RepeatAll is being used. This is the defaultmode when a USB storage deviceor iPod is first connected.

' (Repeat Track): Press thesoftkey below' to repeat onetrack. The tab appears raised whenRepeat Track is being used.

Shuffle Functionality

To use Shuffle:

Press the softkey below>,2,< or= to select betweenShuffle Off, Shuffle All Songs/Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Album,or Shuffle Folder.

> (Shuffle Off): This is thedefault mode when a USB storagedevice or iPod is first connected.

2 (Shuffle All Songs / ShuffleSongs): Shuffles all songs on theUSB storage device or iPod.

< (Shuffle Album): Shufflesall songs in the current album onan iPod.

= (Shuffle Folder): Shuffles allsongs in the current folder on a USBstorage device.



Auxiliary DevicesThe vehicle may have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input jack locatedon the lower right side of thefaceplate and for vehicles with aUSB port, it is located in the centerconsole.

Using the 3.5mm (1/8 in)Auxiliary Input Jack

The auxiliary input jack is located onthe lower right side of the faceplate.This is not an audio output; do notplug a headphone set into the frontauxiliary input jack. Connect anauxiliary input device such as aniPod®, laptop computer, MP3 player,CD player, or cassette tape player,etc. to the auxiliary input jack foruse as another source for audiolistening.

Drivers are encouraged toset up any auxiliary devicewhile the vehicle is in P (Park).See Defensive Driving onpage 9‑2 for more informationon driver distraction.

To use an auxiliary input device,connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.

O (Power/Volume): Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the volumeof the portable player. Additionalvolume adjustments might have tobe made from the portable deviceif the volume is not loud or softenough.

BAND: Press to listen to the radiowhen a portable audio device isplaying. The portable audio devicecontinues playing, so you mightwant to stop it or turn it off.

CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press toselect between CD, or Auxiliary.. When a CD is in the player

the CD icon and a messageshowing the disc and/or tracknumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, “No Input DeviceFound” displays.

DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press toselect between DVD, CD,or Auxiliary.. If an auxiliary input device is

not connected, “No Aux InputDevice” displays.

. When a disc is in either slot, theDVD/CD text tab and a messageshowing the track or chapternumber displays.

. If an auxiliary input device is notconnected, and a disc is in boththe DVD slot and the CD slot theDVD/CD AUX button only cyclesbetween the two sources anddoes not indicate “No Aux InputDevice”.

. If a front auxiliary input deviceis connected, the DVD/CD AUXbutton cycles through allavailable options.



If a disc is inserted into top DVDslot, the rear seat operator can turnon the video screen and use theremote control to only navigatethe CD tracks through the remotecontrol.

See “Using the Auxiliary InputJack(s)” later in this section,or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System on page 7‑38 for moreinformation.

Using the USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, theconnector is located in the centerconsole.

Radios with a USB port can controla USB storage device or an iPod®

using the radio buttons and knobs.See MP3 (Radio with CD and Radiowith CD/USB) on page 7‑24 orMP3 (Radio with CD/DVD) onpage 7‑30 for information abouthow to connect and control a USBstorage device or an iPod.

USB Supported Devices. USB Flash Drives. Portable USB Hard Drives. Fifth generation or later iPod. iPod nanos. iPod touch. iPod classic

Not all iPods and USB Drives arecompatible with the USB port.

Make sure the iPod has the latestfirmware from Apple® for properoperation. iPod firmware can beupdated using the latest iTunes®

application. See www.apple.com/itunes.

For help with identifying your iPod,go to www.apple.com/support.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's audio system. The DVDplayer is part of the front radio.The RSE system includes aradio with a DVD player, a videodisplay screen, audio/video jacks,two wireless headphones, and aremote control. See Operation onpage 7‑2 for more information onthe vehicle's infotainment system.

Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.



In severe or extreme weatherconditions the RSE system mightor might not work until thetemperature is within the operatingrange. The operating range for theRSE system is above −20°C (−4°F)or below 60°C (140°F). If thetemperature of the vehicle is outsideof this range, heat or cool thevehicle until the temperature iswithin the operating range of theRSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon the radio. To enable ParentalControl, press and hold theradio power button for more thantwo seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.While Parental Control is on,Q displays.

When the radio is turned back on,Parental Control is unlocked.

Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA

selections. These headphones areused to listen to media such asCDs, DVDs, MP3/WMAs, DVD-As,radio, any auxiliary sourceconnected to A/V jacks, or theauxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have an On/Off button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Switch the headphones toOff when not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light does not come on,the batteries might need to bereplaced. Intermittent sound orstatic on the headphones can alsobe an indication of weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol located on the right side.



Infrared transmitters are locatedat the rear of the RSE overheadconsole. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitters formore than three minutes. Movingtoo far forward or stepping out of thevehicle, can cause the headphonesto lose the audio signal.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positionedon the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Headphones should be stored inthe front floor console and not in thefront seat back pocket. Headphonedamage can occur when the secondrow seats are folded forward.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audioor video signals to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such asa camcorder or a video gameunit to the RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not supplied)might be required to connect theauxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

The A/V jacks are color coded tomatch typical home entertainmentsystem equipment. The yellowjack (A) is for the video input.The white jack (B) is for the leftaudio input. The red jack (C) isfor the right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol, switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The radio canlisten to the audio of the connectedauxiliary device by sourcing toauxiliary. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑37 for more information.

How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu by using the remote control.To change a setting:

1. Pressz.

2. Usen,q, p,o andr tonavigate and use thesetup menu.

3. Pressz again to remove thesetup menu from the screen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following sources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers. Vehicle‐wired headphone jacks

on the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.



The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source onthe RSA system. See Rear SeatAudio (RSA) System on page 7‑47for more information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack, if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen

The video screen is located in theoverhead console. When the videoscreen is not in use, push it up intoits locked position.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on; this is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.PressP on the remote control oreject the disc to turn off the screen.

The infrared receivers for thewireless headphones and theremote control are located at therear of the overhead console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreen” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim itat the transmitter window atthe rear of the overhead consoleand press the desired button.



Direct sunlight or very bright lightcould affect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remotecontrol does not seem to beworking, the batteries mightneed to be replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O buttoncan be used to turn on the videoscreen display and start the disc.The radio can also turn on the videoscreen display. See Operation onpage 7‑2 for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn thevideo screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight automatically timesout after seven to ten seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press to return the DVDto the main menu of the DVD. Thisfunction could vary for each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor around the DVD menu. Aftermaking a selection press the enterbutton. This button only operateswhen using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to selectthe choice that is highlighted inany menu.

z (Display Menu): Press to adjustthe brightness, screen display mode(normal, full, or zoom), and displaythe language menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return to thebeginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press while a DVDis playing to pause it. Press againto continue playing the DVD.

When the DVD is playing,depending on the radio, play maybe slowed down by pressingsthen[. The DVD continues playingin a slow play mode. Depending onthe radio, perform reverse slow playby pressings thenr. To cancel

slow play mode, presss again.



t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous trackor chapter. This button might notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing

a DVD audio or CD, releaser.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, presss.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release[. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe system between the DVD playerand an auxiliary source.

d (Camera): Press to changecamera angles on DVDs that havethis feature when a DVD is playing.The format and content of thisfunction vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressto select chapter or track numbersgreater than nine. Press this buttonbefore entering the number.

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses aToshiba® code set.



Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back, on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned toON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen.There are black borders on the topand bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings inthe setup menu by pressing thedisplay menu button on the remotecontrol.

In auxiliary mode, the picture movesor scrolls.

Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is noobstruction between the remotecontrol and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make surethey are not dead or installedincorrectly.

After stopping the player, andpushing Play, sometimes the DVDstarts where it left off andsometimes at the beginning.

If the stop button was pressed onetime, the DVD player resumesplaying where the DVD wasstopped. If the stop button waspressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning ofthe DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running, butthere is no picture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screenis in the auxiliary source mode.Check the auxiliary inputconnections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphoneaudio cuts out or buzzes.

Check for obstructions, lowbatteries, reception range,and interference from cellulartelephone towers, or use acellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones areon correctly using the L (left) andR (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphonesare lost.

See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is nopicture or sound.

Check that the RSE video screen issourced to the DVD player.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on which radio the vehiclehas. The video screen might displayone of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whentheZ EJECT button is pressed onthe radio.



DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global Position Systems(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemFor vehicles with Rear Seat Audio(RSA), rear seat passengers canlisten to and control any of themusic sources: radio, CDs, DVDs,or other auxiliary sources. The rearseat passengers can only controlthe music sources the front seatpassengers are not listening to(except on some radios where dualcontrol is allowed). For example,rear seat passengers can controla CD and listen to it through theheadphones, while the driver listensto the radio through the frontspeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The RSA functions operate evenwhen the main radio is off. The frontaudio system displaysX when theRSA is on, and disappears from thedisplay when it is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system mutes the rearspeakers when the RSA audio isactive through the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the front auxiliary input(if available), located on the frontaudio system. Turn the iPod on,then choose the front auxiliary inputwith the RSA SRCE button.



P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase or todecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio (AM/FM/XM™),CD, and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary, andrear auxiliary.

© ¨ (Seek): Press to go to theprevious or to the next station andstay there. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold © or ¨ until thedisplay flashes to tune to anindividual station. The displaystops flashing after the buttonshave not been pushed for morethan two seconds. This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter(if more than ten seconds haveplayed). This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to performa cursor up or down on the menu.Hold © or ¨ to perform a cursor leftor right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to goto the next preset radio stationor channel set on the main radio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the CD or DVD audio.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the disc.



When a disc is playing in the CDor DVD changer, press PROG toselect the next disc, if multiple discsare loaded. This function is inactive,with some radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press PROG to performthe ENTER menu function.

Rear AudioController (RAC)

The vehicle may have the RearAudio Controller (RAC). Certainradio functions can be controlledwith RAC.

xw (Next/Previous): Press thedown or up arrows to go to the nextor to the previous radio stationstored as a favorite.

When a CD/DVD is playing, pressthe down or up arrows to go to thenext or previous track or chapter.

© SEEK ¨ : Press the SEEK arrowsto go to the previous or to the nextradio station while in AM, FM,or XM™, if equipped. Press theSEEK arrows to go to the previousor to the next track or chapter whilesourced to a CD or DVD slot.

SRCE (Source): Press this buttonto switch between the radio, CD,and if the vehicle has thesefeatures, DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

> (Mute): Press this button tosilence the system. Press thisbutton again, or any other radiobutton, to turn the sound on.

+ / − x (Volume): Press the plus orminus volume buttons to increase orto decrease the volume.

Phone

BluetoothVehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The system can be used whilethe key is in the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The rangeof the Bluetooth system can be upto 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phonessupport all functions, and not allphones are guaranteed to work withthe in-vehicle Bluetooth system.See www.gm.com/bluetooth formore information on compatiblephones.



Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levelsto a minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes throughthe vehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call,to change the volume level.The adjusted volume level remainsin memory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

cx (Phone On Hook): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth cell phone must bepaired to the Bluetooth system andthen connected to the vehicle beforeit can be used. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forBluetooth functions before pairingthe cell phone. If a Bluetooth phoneis not connected, calls will be madeusing OnStar Hands‐Free Calling,if available. Refer to the OnStarOwner's Guide for more information.

Pairing Information. Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.. The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.. Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.



. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN number that was providedin Step 3. After the PIN issuccessfully entered, the systemprompts you to provide a namefor the paired cell phone. Thisname will be used to indicatewhich phones are paired andconnected to the vehicle.See “Listing All Paired andConnected Phones” later in thissection for more information.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.



3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.


2. Say “Bluetooth”.

3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will storea phone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”



3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial : This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b g to answer the call.

. Presscx to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b g again to return to theoriginal call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Presscx to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.



Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Presscx to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b g, andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b g, andthen say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” The systemresponds “Bluetooth ready,”followed by a tone.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see thepreviou section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for FCC information.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Rear Climate Control System(Rear ClimateControl Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Climate Control SystemsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control



D. Air Conditioning


F. Recirculation

G. Rear Window Defogger


8-2 Climate Controls

9 (Off): Turn the fan control all theway counterclockwise to turn thefront climate control system off.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease thetemperature of the air flowingfrom the system.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise tochange the current airflow mode.

By positioning the right knobbetween two modes, a combinationof those two modes is selected.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemautomatically selects outside air.Recirculation cannot be selectedwhile in floor mode.

- (Defog): This clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, the

system turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning unless theoutside temperature is less than4°C (40°F). Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defog mode.Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

0 (Defrost): This clears thewindshield of fog or frost, morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some to the floor vents. In thismode, outside air is pulled insidethe vehicle. Recirculation cannot beselected while in the defrost mode.The air conditioning system runsautomatically in this setting, unlessthe outside temperature is less than4°C (40°F). Do not drive the vehicleuntil all the windows are clear.



# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on. The air conditioningsystem does not operate whenthe outside temperature is below4°C (40°F). The indicator lightflashes three times and turns offwhen outside conditions affect airconditioning operation. This isnormal.

For quicker cool down on hot days:

1. Open the windows to let hot airescape.

2. SelectH mode.

3. Select#.

4. Select the coolest temperature.

5. Select the highest fan speed.

6. Close the windows after the hotair has escaped.

7. Once the vehicle's interiortemperature is below the outsidetemperature, select@ modefor faster cooling.

Using recirculation for long periodsof time could cause the air insideof the vehicle to become too dry.To prevent this from happening,after the inside of the vehiclehas cooled, turn the recirculationmode off.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air,so water might drip under thevehicle while idling or after turningoff the engine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and mustbe re‐selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defrost, or defoggingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning also comes on whenthis mode is activated unless theoutside air temperature is less than4°C (40°F). While in recirculationmode the windows can fog whenthe weather is cold and damp.To clear the fog, select either thedefog or defrost mode and increasethe fan speed.

REAR (Rear Climate Control):Press to turn the rear heating andair conditioning on or off. See RearClimate Control System (RearClimate Control Only) on page 8‑10or Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear Seat Audio)on page 8‑11.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.



< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rear windowdefogger stays on for about10 minutes, before automaticallyturning off. The defogger willalso turn off when the engineis turned off.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when< is pressed.

Notice: Do not use anythingsharp on the inside of the rearwindow. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid,and the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehiclelicense, tape, a decal or anythingsimilar to the defogger grid.

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation


F. Air Delivery Mode Control

G. Driver Side Temperature Control

H. Display

I. Power (On/Off)

J. Rear Window Defogger

K. Air Conditioning

L. PASS (Passenger)

M. Passenger Side TemperatureControl



Display Function

Each time the temperature, mode,or fan control buttons are pressed,the climate control display showsthat function along with the insidetemperature setting. The outsidetemperature is displayed on theinstrument panel cluster.

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.While the system is off, outside airstill enters through the floor outlets,but the air delivery mode can beadjusted.

The climate control system willalso turn on if either the fan control,defrost, AUTO, or air conditioningbuttons are pressed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): The systemautomatically controls the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

To use automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thecurrent temperature(s) selectedand AUTO is shown on thedisplay. The current air deliverymode and fan speed alsoappear for approximatelyfive seconds.

When AUTO is selected, theair conditioning and air inletare automatically controlled.The air conditioning runs whenthe outside temperature is over4°C (40°F). The system isautomatically set to outsideair, unless it is hot outside andthen the air inlet changes torecirculation mode to help

quickly cool the vehicle.The recirculation indicatorlight will come on.

2. Set the temperature for thedriver and passenger.

To find a comfortable setting,start with a 22°C (73°F)temperature setting andallow about 20 minutes for thesystem to regulate. Use thedriver's side or passenger sidetemperature buttons to adjustthe temperature setting asnecessary. The system willremain at the selected setting.Choosing the warmest or coolesttemperatures does not causethe vehicle to heat or cool morequickly.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system delaysturning on the fan until warmair is available. Press the fancontrol to override this delayand select the fan speed.



Temperature Control

The driver and passenger sidetemperature buttons are usedto adjust the temperature of theair coming through the system.The temperature can be adjustedeven if the system is turnedoff since outside air still entersthe vehicle, unless therecirculation mode is selected.See “Recirculation” later in thissection.

Driver Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease the driverside temperature. The driver sidetemperature display will show thetemperature setting.

Passenger Side TemperatureControl: Press the + or − buttonsto increase or decrease thepassenger side temperature.The passenger side display willshow the temperature setting.

PASS (Passenger): Press to setthe passenger temperature to matchthe driver temperature setting. ThePASS indicator will turn off. Whenthe passenger temperature settingis different than the driver setting,the PASS indicator comes on.

Manual Operation

The air delivery mode or fan speedcan be manually adjusted.

D / C (Fan Control): Press toincrease or decrease the fan speed.

Pressing D or C while in automaticcontrol places the fan speed undermanual control.

The air delivery mode remains inautomatic control. The fan settingstill displays, but the word AUTOno longer displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press H or G until thedesired mode appears on thedisplay. Pressing a mode buttonwhile the system is off changes theair delivery mode without turningthe system on. Press a mode buttonwhile in automatic control to placethe system into manual control.

The air delivery mode setting stilldisplays, but the word AUTO nolonger displays, and the AUTObutton indicator light turns off.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper outlets andwarmer air to the floor outlets.



6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some of the airdirected to the windshield, sidewindow, and second row flooroutlets. In this mode, the systemuses outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents.When this mode is selected, thesystem turns off recirculation andruns the air conditioning compressorunless the outside temperature isless than 4°C (40°F). Do not drivethe vehicle until all the windows areclear.

0 (Defrost): Press to turn thedefrost on or off. This mode quicklyclears the windshield of fog or frost.Air is directed to the windshield,side window, and floor vents.

In this mode, outside air ispulled inside the vehicle.The air conditioning systemruns automatically in this setting,unless the outside temperatureis less than 4°C (40°F).

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

While in defrost mode, if thePASS button is pressed, thePASS button indicator flashes threetimes to show that the passengerclimate control system cannotbe activated. If the passengertemperature buttons are adjustedwhile in defrost mode, the drivertemperature indicator will change.The passenger temperature willnot be displayed.

When returning to bi-level, vent,or floor mode, the previoustemperature settings displays inplace of any change made whilein defrost mode.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C) onand off. An indicator light comes onwhen A/C is on.

The A/C does not work when theoutside temperature is below 4°C(40°F). If# is pressed the indicatorflashes three times and turns offto show that the A/C mode is notavailable. If the A/C is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the A/Cindicator turns off to show that theA/C mode has been canceled.

On hot days, open the windowsbriefly to let hot inside air escape.This helps reduce the time it takesfor the interior of the vehicle tocool down.



The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, sowater might drip under the vehiclewhile idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off.An indicator light comes on whenrecirculation is on. When the engineis turned off, the recirculation modeautomatically turns off and must bere‐selected when the engine isturned on again.

This mode recirculates and helpsto quickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostingmodes. If recirculation is selected inthese modes, the indicator flashesthree times and turns off. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows can fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

REAR: Press to turn the rearheating and air conditioning onor off. See Rear Climate ControlSystem (Rear Climate Control Only)on page 8‑10 or Rear ClimateControl System (Rear Climate withRear Seat Audio) on page 8‑11.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

< (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. The rearwindow defogger stays on forabout 10 minutes, before turningoff. The defogger also turns offwhen the engine is turned off.Do not drive the vehicle untilall the windows are clear.

For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, fog or frost iscleared from the surface of themirror when the rear window defogbutton is pressed.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.



Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

The interior temperature sensorlocated on the instrument panelto the right of the steering column,measures the temperature of theair inside the vehicle.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor located behindthe front grille. This sensor reads

the outside air temperature andhelps maintain the temperatureinside the vehicle. Any cover onthe front of the vehicle could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system usesthe information from these sensorsto maintain comfort settings byadjusting the temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.



Rear Climate Control System (Rear ClimateControl Only)

A. Fan Control



For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole. The system can also becontrolled with the front controls.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. An indicator comes on when therear system is on. The system alsoturns on if any of the rear controlsare adjusted.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of therear controls. It comes on whenany rear control is adjusted.

Fan Control: Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Turn theknob to9 to turn the fan off.

Temperature Control: Turnclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the airflowtemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Turnto the desired mode to change theairflow direction.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.



Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

For vehicles with the rear climatecontrol system, the controls arelocated on the rear of the centerconsole.

Press the REAR button on the frontclimate control system to turn therear climate control system on oroff. The system also turns on ifany of the rear controls, except forthe C are pressed. An indicatorcomes on when the rear systemis on.

The system can also be turnedoff, by pressing and holdingthe C button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control settings. It comes onwhen REAR is pressed.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of therear controls. It comes on whenany rear control is adjusted.

D C (Fan Control): Press the fanup or down buttons to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Press+ or − to increase or decreasethe air temperature. Thetemperature settings will display in0‐12 increments, going from thecoolest (0) to the warmest (12)setting.



N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press to manually change thedirection of the airflow. Repeatedlypress the button until the desiredmode appears on the display.

H (Vent): Air is directed throughthe overhead outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directedthrough the rear floor outlets, aswell as the overhead outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed throughthe floor outlets. The rear systemfloor outlets are located under thethird row seats.

Air VentsUse the slider switch in the centerof the outlet, to change the directionof the air flow. Use the thumbwheelnear the outlet to control the amountof air flow or to shut off the airflow.

Keep all outlets open wheneverpossible for best systemperformance.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from the air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.

. Keep the path under all seatsclear of objects to help circulatethe air inside the vehicle moreeffectively.

. If fogging reoccurs while invent or bi-level modes withmild temperature throughoutthe vehicle, turn on the airconditioner to reduce windshieldfogging.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDefensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-17Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Parking Over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-36Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-43Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-43California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-44Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56


9-2 Driving and Operating

Driving Information

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearyour safety belt, see Safety Belts onpage 3‑16.

{ WARNING

Assume that other road users(pedestrians, bicyclists, and otherdrivers) are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipatewhat they might do and be ready.In addition:

. Allow enough followingdistance between you andthe driver in front of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Driver distraction can causecollisions resulting in injury orpossible death. These simpledefensive driving techniquescould save your life.

Drunk Driving

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness,and judgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you driveafter drinking. Do not drink anddrive or ride with a driver who hasbeen drinking. Ride home in acab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will notdrink.

Death and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

Alcohol affects four things thatanyone needs to drive a vehicle:judgment, muscular coordination,vision, and attentiveness.

Police records show thatalmost 40 percent of all motorvehicle-related deaths involvealcohol. In most cases, thesedeaths are the result of someonewho was drinking and driving.In recent years, more than17,000 annual motor vehicle-relateddeaths have been associated withthe use of alcohol, with about250,000 people injured.

For persons under 21, it is againstthe law in every U.S. state to drinkalcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate theleading highway safety problem isfor people never to drink alcoholand then drive.



Medical research shows thatalcohol in a person's systemcan make crash injuries worse,especially injuries to the brain,spinal cord, or heart. This meansthat when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — isin a crash, that person's chance ofbeing killed or permanently disabledis higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

Control of a VehicleThe following three systemshelp to control the vehicle whiledriving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as whendriving on snow or ice, it is easy toask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑31.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑20.

Braking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Decidingto push the brake pedal isperception time. Actually doingit is reaction time.

Average reaction time is aboutthree‐fourths of a second. But thatis only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long astwo or three seconds or more withanother. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, andeyesight all play a part. So doalcohol, drugs, and frustration.But even in three‐fourths of asecond, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft). That could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space betweenthe vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stoppingdistances vary greatly with thesurface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the conditionof the road, whether it is wet, dry,or icy; tire tread; the condition of thebrakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake forceapplied.

Avoid needless heavybraking. Some people drive inspurts — heavy accelerationfollowed by heavy braking — ratherthan keeping pace with traffic.This is a mistake. The brakesmight not have time to cool betweenhard stops. The brakes will wearout much faster with a lot of heavybraking. Keeping pace with thetraffic and allowing realistic followingdistances eliminates a lot ofunnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.



If the engine ever stops whilethe vehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. If the brakes are pumped,the pedal could get harder to pushdown. If the engine stops, there willstill be some power brake assist butit will be used when the brake isapplied. Once the power assist isused up, it can take longer to stopand the brake pedal will be harderto push.

Adding non‐dealer accessoriescan affect vehicle performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

Steering

Power Steering

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but it will take more effort.

Variable Effort Steering

The vehicle has a steering systemthat continuously adjusts the effortfelt when steering at all vehiclespeeds. It provides ease whenparking, yet a firm, solid feel athighway speeds.

Steering Tips

It is important to take curves at areasonable speed.

Traction in a curve depends on thecondition of the tires and the roadsurface, the angle at which thecurve is banked, and vehicle speed.While in a curve, speed is the onefactor that can be controlled.

If there is a need to reduce speed,do it before entering the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight.

Try to adjust the speed so you candrive through the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed. Wait toaccelerate until out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into thestraightaway.



Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steeringcan be more effective than braking.For example, you come over a hilland find a truck stopped in yourlane, or a car suddenly pulls outfrom nowhere, or a child darts outfrom between parked cars and stopsright in front of you. These problemscan be avoided by braking— if youcan stop in time. But sometimes youcannot stop in time because thereis no room. That is the time forevasive action— steering aroundthe problem.

The vehicle can perform verywell in emergencies like these.First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 9‑3 . It is better to removeas much speed as possible froma collision. Then steer aroundthe problem, to the left or rightdepending on the space available.

An emergency like this requiresclose attention and a quick decision.If holding the steering wheel atthe recommended 9 and 3 o'clockpositions, it can be turned a full180 degrees very quickly withoutremoving either hand. But you haveto act fast, steer quickly, and just asquickly straighten the wheel onceyou have avoided the object.

The fact that such emergencysituations are always possible is agood reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safetybelts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryThe vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving.

If the level of the shoulder isonly slightly below the pavement,recovery should be fairly easy.



Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steerso that the vehicle straddles theedge of the pavement. Turn thesteering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to5 inches), about one-eighth turn,until the right front tire contactsthe pavement edge. Then turn thesteering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving expertssay about what happens when thethree control systems— brakes,steering, and acceleration— do nothave enough friction where the tiresmeet the road to do what the driverhas asked.

In any emergency, do not give up.Keep trying to steer and constantlyseek an escape route or area ofless danger.

Skidding

In a skid, a driver can lose control ofthe vehicle. Defensive drivers avoidmost skids by taking reasonablecare suited to existing conditions,and by not overdriving thoseconditions. But skids are alwayspossible.

The three types of skids correspondto the vehicle's three controlsystems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In thesteering or cornering skid, too muchspeed or steering in a curve causestires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, toomuch throttle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

If the vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the accelerator pedaland quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, the vehiclemay straighten out. Always be readyfor a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced whenwater, snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial is on the road. For safety,slow down and adjust your drivingto these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfacesbecause stopping distance is longerand vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface withreduced traction, try to avoidsudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducingvehicle speed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You mightnot realize the surface is slipperyuntil the vehicle is skidding. Learnto recognize warning clues— suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface— and slowdown when you have any doubt.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.



Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause yourvehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under your vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑39.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park your vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep interior temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes willhave to do all the work of slowingdown and they could get so hotthat they would not work well.You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Top of hills: Bealert — somethingcould be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area,winding roads, long grades,passing or no-passing zones)and take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑29 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be in aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑8.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air insidethe vehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and killyou. You cannot see it or smell it,so you might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph) as shown on thespeedometer.

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑61.



Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionor stability system. Shift back andforth between R (Reverse) and aforward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does notget the vehicle out after a few tries,it might need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towedout, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑89.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to knowhow much weight your vehiclecan carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).If you do, parts on the vehiclecan break, and it can changethe way the vehicle handles.These could cause you tolose control and crash. Also,overloading can shorten thelife of the vehicle.



Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Example Label

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar) of your vehicle. Withthe driver's door open, you willfind the label attached below thedoor lock post (striker). The tireand loading information labelshows the number of occupantseating positions (A), and the

maximum vehicle capacityweight (B) in kilograms andpounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label alsoshows the size of theoriginal equipment tires (C)and the recommended coldtire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑39 and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR)for the front and rear axle.See “Certification/Tire Label”later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.



4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity foryour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.



Certification/Tire Label

Label Example

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver's door.

The label shows the grossweight capacity of yourvehicle. This is called the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or eitherthe maximum front or rearGross Axle Weight Rating

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

(GAWR). If you do, parts onthe vehicle can break, andit can change the way thevehicle handles. These couldcause you to lose control andcrash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of the vehicle.

Notice : Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Do not overload the vehicle.

If you put things inside yourvehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else, theywill go as fast as the vehiclegoes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.



{ WARNING

Things you put inside yourvehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of your vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin your vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. If you have all-wheel drive,keep your speed at 88 km/h(55mph) or less for the first805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast orslow, for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑48 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.



Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

In order to shift out of P (Park),the ignition must be in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and the brakepedal must be applied.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,

and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

( (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑19.

This position locks the ignitionand transmission. The key canbe removed in LOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

In an emergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicleto a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑30.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicleneeds service.



ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisis the position in which you canoperate the electrical accessoriesor items plugged into the accessorypower outlets. This position unlocksthe ignition and steering wheel. Usethis position if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

R (ON/RUN): This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel warning andindicator lights. The switch staysin this position when the engineis running. The transmission isalso unlocked in this position.If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be ableto start the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This is the positionthat starts the engine. When theengine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return toON/RUN for driving.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theignition key is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the windows and sunroofwill work up to 10 minutes or until adoor is opened.

The radio continues to work for10 minutes or until the driver's dooris opened.

For an additional 10 minutes ofoperation, close all the doors andturn the key to ON/RUN and thenback to LOCK/OFF.

All these features will work whenthe key is in the ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY positions.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition toSTART. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idlespeed will slow down as theengine warms. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists in



starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition keyis turned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the enginedoes not start and the key isheld in START, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents crankingif the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switchto the ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5‐10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in STARTfor up to a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat thesesteps. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below 0°F (−18°C). Vehicleswith an engine coolant heatershould be plugged in at leastfour hours before starting. Somemodels may have an internalthermostat in the cord which willprevent engine coolant heateroperation at temperatures above0°F (−18°C).



To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord. The cord islocated on the driver side of theengine compartment. It is routedaround the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not, it couldbe damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

1. Hold the brake pedal downand set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑30 for more information.



2. Move the shift lever into P (Park)by holding in the button on theshift lever and pushing the shiftlever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, besure the vehicle is in P (Park)and the parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pushing thebutton.

If you can, it means that the shiftlever was not fully locked inP (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, yourvehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting Out of ParkThe vehicle is equipped withan electronic shift lock releasesystem. The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released, and

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unlessthe ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Press the shift lever button.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift leverbutton again.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealer.

Parking Over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle’s exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or after-marketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.



{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑21.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑21. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑48.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply the



regular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting Out of Park onpage 9‑23.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑11.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the enginewhen the vehicle is already moving,use N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.

The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away. You candrive in L (Low) when you aredriving less than 56 km/h (35mph)and D (Drive) for higher speedsuntil then.



If the vehicle is stopped on a hill,with your foot off the brake pedal,the vehicle may roll. This is normaland is due to the torque converterdesigned to improve fuel economyand performance. Use the brake tohold the vehicle on a hill. Do not usethe accelerator pedal.

L (Low): This position givesyou access to gear ranges. Thisprovides more engine braking butlower fuel economy than D (Drive).You can use it on very steep hills,or in deep snow or mud.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS mode allows you to choose thetop-gear limit of the transmissionand the vehicle's speed whiledriving down hill or towing a trailer.The vehicle has an electronicshift position indicator withinthe instrument panel cluster.

When using the ERS Mode anumber will display next to the L,indicating the current gear that hasbeen selected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever to L (Low).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonlocated on the shift lever, toincrease or decrease the gearrange available.

When you shift from D (Drive) toL (Low), the transmission will shift toa pre-determined lower gear range.The highest gear available for thispre-determined range is displayednext to the L in the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑25 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑29 formore information. The numberdisplayed in the DIC is the highestgear that the transmission will beallowed to operate in. This meansthat all gears below that numberare available. For example, when

4 (Fourth) is shown next to the L,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areautomatically shifted by the vehicle.The transmission will not shift into5 (Fifth) until the + (Plus) button isused or you shift back into D (Drive).

While in L (Low), the transmissionwill prevent shifting to a lower gearrange if the engine speed is toohigh. You have a brief period oftime to slow the vehicle. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. You mustfurther slow the vehicle, then pressthe − (Minus) button to the desiredlower gear range.

Automatic Engine Grade brakingis not available when the ERS isactive. It is available in D (Drive) forboth normal and Tow/Haul mode.While using the ERS, cruise controland the tow/haul mode can be used.See Tow/Haul Mode following.



Tow/Haul Mode_ (Tow/Haul): The vehicle mayhave a Tow/Haul mode.

The button is located on theinstrument panel under the climatecontrols.

Push the button to activate thesystem. Push it again to deactivatethe system. You can use this featureto assist when towing or hauling aheavy load.

When Tow/Haul is activated theTow/Haul symbol will come onthe instrument panel cluster. See“Tow/Haul Mode” under DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑48 for more information.

Automatic Engine GradeBraking

Automatic Engine Grade Brakingassists when driving on a downhillgrade. It maintains vehicle speed byautomatically implementing a shiftschedule that uses the engine andthe transmission to slow the vehicle.The system will automaticallycommand downshifts to reducevehicle speed, until the brake pedalis no longer being pressed.

While in the Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) mode, grade brakingis deactivated, allowing the driverto select a range and limiting thehighest gear available. Gradebraking is available for normaldriving and in Tow/Haul mode.

See Automatic Transmission onpage 9‑25.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tireon an AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83 for more information.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started andthe vehicle begins to drive away,ABS checks itself. A momentarymotor or clicking noise might beheard while this test is going on,and it might even be noticed thatthe brake pedal moves a little.This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑21.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary to slamon the brakes and continue brakingto avoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.



Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Lighton page 5‑20.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑48.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has the StabiliTraksystem which combines antilockbrake, traction and stability controlsystems and helps the drivermaintain directional control of thevehicle in most driving conditions.

When you first start the vehicle andbegin to drive away, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto ensure there are no problems.The system may be heard orfelt while it is working. This isnormal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.The system should initialize beforethe vehicle reaches 32 km/h(20 mph). In some cases, it maytake approximately 3.2 km (2 miles)of driving before the systeminitializes.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, one of the followingmessages will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center(DIC): SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL, SERVICESTABILITRAK, the StabiliTraklight will come on and stay andfour chimes are heard. If theseconditions are observed, turnthe vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,and then turn it back on again toreset the system. If any of thesemessages still appear on theDriver Information Center (DIC),the vehicle should be taken in forservice. For more information onthe DIC messages, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) (With DICButtons) on page 5‑25 or DriverInformation Center (DIC) (WithoutDIC Buttons) on page 5‑29.



The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem is both on and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The traction control button is locatedon the instrument panel.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the tractioncontrol button.

Traction control can be turnedon by pressing and releasing thetraction control button and theappropriate TRACTION CONTROLON message will be displayed, if notautomatically shut off for any otherreason.

When the traction control systemis turned off, the appropriateTRACTION CONTROL OFFmessage will be displayed onthe DIC. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed management

system. See “Traction ControlOperation” following for moreinformation.

When the traction control systemhas been turned off, system noisesmay be heard and felt as a result ofthe brake-traction control working.

It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicleto attempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle is Stuckon page 9‑11.



Traction Control Operation

The traction control system is partof the StabiliTrak system. Tractioncontrol limits wheel spin by reducingengine power to the wheels (enginespeed management) and byapplying the brakes as necessary.

The traction control system isenabled automatically when thevehicle is started. It will activateand the StabiliTrak light will flashif it senses that any of the wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If tractioncontrol is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portionof traction control will work.The engine speed managementwill be disabled. In this mode,engine power is not reducedautomatically and the drivenwheels can spin more freely.This can cause the brake-tractioncontrol to activate constantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spinthe wheel(s) excessively whilethese lights and messages aredisplayed.

The traction control system mayactivate on dry or rough roads orunder conditions such as heavyacceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens,a reduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑34.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines thata problem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morecan be maintained without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, thecruise control is disengaged.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

The cruise control buttons arelocated on left side of the steeringwheel.

T (On/Off): Press to turn cruisecontrol on and off. The indicatorcomes on when cruise control is on.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET– : Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or to makethe vehicle decelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button to turn thecruise control system on.

2. Get up to the speed desired.

3. Press and release the SET–button located on the steeringwheel.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed is 40 km/h(25 mph) or greater, press the+RES button on the steering wheel.The vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, press the+RES button briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thelower speed desired is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button briefly.Each time this is done, thevehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to thepreviously set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control will workon hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness of

the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brakeor shift to a lower gear to keep thevehicle speed down. When thebrakes are applied the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. Step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press the [ button.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressT on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheT button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph), and assists thedriver with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).The sensors on the rear bumperare used to detect the distance toan object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behindthe vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm(10 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system does notreplace driver vision. It cannotdetect:

. Objects that are below thebumper, underneath thevehicle, or too close or farfrom the vehicle

. Children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

If you do not use proper carebefore and while backing, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with URPA, alwayscheck behind the vehicle beforebacking up. While backing, besure to look for objects and checkthe vehicle's mirrors.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 5 mph (8 km/h).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeps arecontinuous.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25.4 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.



The system can be disabled throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Park Assist” under VehiclePersonalization (With DIC Buttons)on page 5‑45 for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the URPA system does notactivate due to a temporarycondition, the message PARKASSIST OFF or PARK ASSTBLOCKED SEE OWNERSMANUAL will be displayed onthe DIC.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST: If thismessage occurs, take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

PARK ASSIST OFF: This messageoccurs if the driver disables thesystem.

PARK ASST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑92.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message maynot clear until the frost or icehas melted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the last drive cycle. Oncethe attached object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The vehicle's bumper isdamaged. Take the vehicle toyour dealer to repair the system.

. Other conditions may affectsystem performance, such asvibrations from a jackhammeror the compression of air brakeson a very large truck.

If the system is still disabled, afterdriving forward at least 25 km/h(15 mph), take the vehicle to yourdealer.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera system. Read this entiresection before using it.

{ WARNING

The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)system does not replace drivervision. RVC does not:

. Detect objects that areoutside the camera's field ofview, below the bumper,or underneath the vehicle.

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or pets.

Do not back the vehicle by onlylooking at the RVC screen, or usethe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers orwhere there could be cross-traffic.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Your judged distances using thescreen will differ from actualdistances.

If you do not use proper carebefore backing up, you couldhit a vehicle, child, pedestrian,bicyclist, or pet, resulting invehicle damage, injury, or death.Even though the vehicle hasthe RVC system, always checkcarefully before backing up bychecking behind and around thevehicle.

Vehicles Without NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera system isdesigned to help the driver whenbacking up by displaying a viewof the area behind the vehicle.

When the key is in the ON/RUNposition and the driver shifts thevehicle into R (Reverse), the videoimage automatically appears on theinside rear view mirror. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse),the video image automaticallydisappears from the inside rearview mirror.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem Off or On

To turn off the rear vision camerasystem, press and holdz, locatedon the inside rearview mirror, untilthe left indicator light turns off.The rear vision camera display isnow disabled.

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on again, press andholdz until the left indicator lightilluminates. The rear vision camerasystem display is now enabled andthe display will appear in the mirrornormally.



Vehicles With NavigationSystem

The rear vision camera systemis designed to help the driverwhen backing up by displayinga view of the area behind thevehicle. When the driver shiftsthe vehicle into R (Reverse), thevideo image automatically appearson the navigation screen. Once thedriver shifts out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the MENU button to enterthe configure menu options,then press the MENU hard keyto select Display or touch theDisplay screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen buttonis highlighted the RVC systemis on.

The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse)is approximately 10 seconds.The delay can be cancelled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

5 mph (8 km/h).

There is a message on the rearvision camera screen that states“Check Surroundings for Safety”.



Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theMENU button while the rear visioncamera image is on the display.Any adjustments made will onlyaffect the rear vision camera screen.

] (Brightness) : Touch the+ (plus) or – (minus) screen buttonsto increase or decrease thebrightness of the screen.

_ (Contrast) : Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the contrastof the screen.

Symbols

The navigation system may havea feature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the navigation screenwhile using the rear vision camera.The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist(URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, the

Rear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑36.

The symbols appear when an objecthas been detected by the URPAsystem. The symbol may cover theobject when viewing the navigationscreen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.

2. Shift into P (Park).

3. Press the MENU hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the MENUhard key repeatedly until Displayis selected or touch the Displayscreen button.

4. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen will display.

5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button willbe highlighted when on.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

Service Rear Vision CameraSystem: This message can displaywhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.



The area displayed by the camera islimited and does not display objectsthat are close to either corneror under the bumper. The areadisplayed can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screendiffers from the actual distance.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The rear vision camera systemmight not work properly or displaya clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.



. The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to havethe camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

. There are extreme temperaturechanges.

The rear vision camera systemdisplay in the rearview mirrormay turn off or not appear asexpected due to one of the followingconditions. If this occurs the leftindicator light on the mirror willflash.. A slow flash may indicate a

loss of video signal, or no videosignal present during the reversecycle.

. A fast flash may indicate thatthe display has been on forthe maximum allowable timeduring a reverse cycle, or thedisplay has reached an OverTemperature limit.

The fast flash conditions areused to protect the videodevice from high temperatureconditions. Once conditionsreturn to normal the device willreset and the green indicatorwill stop flashing.

During any of these fault conditions,the display will be blank and theindicator will continue to flash aslong as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)or until the conditions return tonormal.

Pressing and holdingz when theleft indicator light is flashing will turnoff the video display along with theleft indicator light.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, an audible knockingnoise, commonly referred to asspark knock, might be heardwhen driving. If this occurs, usea gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑44 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California emissionsstandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.



Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf you plan on driving in anothercountry outside the United Statesor Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leadedgasoline or any other fuel notrecommended in the previous texton fuel. Costly repairs caused byuse of improper fuel would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, allgasolines in the United States arenow required to contain additivesthat help prevent engine and fuelsystem deposits from forming,allowing the emission controlsystem to work properly. In mostcases, nothing should have to beadded to the fuel. However, somegasolines contain only the minimumamount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency regulations. To help keepfuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if the vehicle experiencesproblems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline. Look for the TOP TIERlabel on the fuel pump to ensuregasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, addedto the fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines mightbe available in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than10% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.



Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT);ask the attendant where you buygasoline whether the fuel containsMMT. We recommend againstthe use of such gasolines. Fuelscontaining MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and theperformance of the emissioncontrol system could be affected.The malfunction indicator lampmight turn on. If this occurs, returnto your dealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.



While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and waita few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑92.

When replacing the fuel cap,turn it clockwise until it clicks.Make sure the cap is fully installed.

The diagnostic system candetermine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperlyinstalled. This would allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑18.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage thefuel tank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑18.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑89. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motorhome, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑89.



Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer istoo heavy, the brakes maynot work well— or even at all.The driver and passengers couldbe seriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see Trailer Towing on

page 9‑52. Trailering changeshandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.With the added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies andtires are forced to work harder andunder greater loads. The trailer alsoadds wind resistance, increasingthe pulling requirements. For safetrailering, correctly use the propertrailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling A Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements.

. Consider using sway control.See Towing Equipment onpage 9‑54.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over80 km/h (50 mph) and do notmake starts at full throttle. Thisreduces wear on the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.See “Tow/Haul Mode” later inthis section.

. Obey speed limit restrictionswhen towing a trailer.

. The vehicle is designed primarilyas a passenger and loadcarrying vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the vehicle will requiremore frequent maintenance dueto the additional load.



Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is nowlonger and not as responsiveas the vehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch partsand attachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting tothe vehicle movement caused bythe trailer, which mainly occursduring cornering. This is normalwhen towing heavier trailers.

Tow/Haul Mode

Tow/Haul assists when pulling aheavy trailer or a large or heavyload. The purpose of the Tow/Haulmode is to:. Reduce the frequency and

improve the predictability oftransmission shifts.

. Provide the same solid shift feelas when the vehicle is unloaded.

. Improve control of vehicle speedwhile requiring less throttle pedalactivity.

. Increase the charging systemvoltage to assist in recharging abattery installed in a trailer.

Press this button located on theconsole to turn on and turn off theTow/Haul mode. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑28.

The Tow/Haul light on theinstrument panel comes on toindicate that Tow/Haul modehas been selected.

Tow/Haul may be turned off bypressing the button again, atwhich time the indicator light onthe instrument panel will turn off.The vehicle will automatically turnoff Tow/Haul every time it is started.



Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See Trailer Towing on page 9‑52.Tow/Haul is most useful whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load under the followingdriving conditions:. Travelling through rolling terrain.. Travelling in stop and go traffic.. Travelling in busy parking lots

where improved low speedcontrol of the vehicle is desired.

Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerwill not cause damage but there isno benefit. Such a selection whenunloaded may result in unpleasantengine and transmission drivingcharacteristics and reduced fueleconomy.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.



Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting downa long or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hot andno longer work well. See “AutomaticEngine Grade Braking” within Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑28.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑20.

On a long uphill grade, shift downand reduce the vehicle speed toaround 88 km/h (55 mph) to reducethe possibility of the engine and thetransmission overheating.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, butdo not shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.



3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal.Then apply the parking brakeand shift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:. Start the engine.. Shift into a gear.. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Trailer TowingThree important considerationshave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is inthe tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Maximum Trailer Weight *GCWR

Front‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,500 lbs (3 402 kg)

Front‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,250 lbs (4 649 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 7,700 lbs (3 493 kg)

All‐Wheel Drive, V92 Trailer Towing Package 5,200 lbs (2 359 kg) 10,450 lbs (4 740 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle andtrailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or advice.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑5 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo carried in it, and thepeople who will be riding in thevehicle. If there are a lot of options,

equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be addedto the GVW because the vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10‐15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires tothe upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be foundon the Certification label or seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑12for more information. Do not go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

It is important to have the correcthitch equipment. Crosswinds, largetrucks going by and rough roads area few reasons why the right hitch isneeded.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitchthat does not attach to thebumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, then be sure to seal theholes when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed,dirt, water, and deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaustmay get into the vehicle. SeeEngine Exhaust on page 9‑24.



Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches

A. Body-to-Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the hitch must be adjusted sothat the distance (A) remains thesame both before and after couplingthe trailer to the tow vehicle.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Always leave just enough slack sothe rig can turn. Never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 450 kg (1,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system thatis adequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not try to tap into thevehicle's hydraulic brake system.If you do, both brake systems willnot work well, or at all.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Basic Trailer Wiring

The trailer wiring harness, with aseven-pin connector, is located atthe rear of the vehicle and is tied tothe vehicle's frame. The harnessconnector can be plugged into aseven-pin universal heavy-dutytrailer connector available throughyour dealer.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. Black: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Black: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*



*The fuse for this circuit is installedin the underhood electrical center,but the wires are not connected.They should be connected by yourdealer or a qualified service center.

If the back-up lamp circuit is notfunctional, contact your dealer.

If a remote (non-vehicle) battery isbeing charged, press the Tow/Haulmode switch located on the centerconsole near the climate controls.This will boost the vehicle systemvoltage and properly charge thebattery. If the trailer is too lightfor Tow/Haul mode, turn on theheadlamps (Non‐HID only) as asecond way to boost the vehiclesystem and charge the battery.

Electric Trailer Brake ControlWiring Provisions

These wiring provisions for anelectric trailer brake controllerare included with the vehicle aspart of the trailer wiring package.The instrument panel containsblunt cut wires behind the steeringcolumn for the electric trailer brakecontroller. The harness contains thefollowing wires:. Red/Black: Power Supply. White: Brake Switch Signal. Gray: Illumination. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake Signal. Black: Ground

The electric trailer brake controllershould be installed by your dealer ora qualified service center.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑45 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑46.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Windshield Replacement . . . 10-30

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Electrical SystemHigh Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Electrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-40Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-83

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-89Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100

General InformationFor service and parts needs,visit your dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries containedin remote keyless transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessoriesto the vehicle can affect vehicleperformance and safety, includingsuch things as airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling,emissions systems, aerodynamics,durability, and electronic systemslike antilock brakes, traction control,and stability control. Some of theseaccessories could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from the installation or useof non‐GM certified parts, includingcontrol module modifications, is notcovered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. Your GMdealer can accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories.When you go to your GM dealerand ask for GM Accessories, youwill know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians willperform the work using genuine GMAccessories.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑46.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. English andmetric fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑15.


Vehicle Care 10-5

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑45.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑9.

HoodTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handlewith this symbol on it. It islocated under the instrumentpanel on the driver's side ofthe vehicle.

2. At the front of the vehicle, pullup on the center of the hood,and push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

3. After you have partiallylifted the hood, gas struts willautomatically take over to liftand hold the hood in the fullyopen position.

Before closing the hood, be sure allfiller caps are on properly.

Pull the hood down to close. Lowerthe hood until the lifting pressure ofthe strut is reduced. Then allow thehood to fall and latch into placeunder its own weight. Check tomake sure the hood is closed. If thehood does not fully latch, gentlypush the hood down at the frontand center of the hood until it iscompletely latched.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Radiator Pressure Cap.See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Coolant RecoveryCap. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14.

C. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84.

D. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑33.

E. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84.

F. Power Steering Reservoir andCap (under engine cover).See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑22.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

H. Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑8.

J. Automatic Transmission FluidDipstick. See “Checking theFluid Level” under AutomaticTransmission Fluid onpage 10‑12.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brakes on page 10‑24.

L. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Engine Cover

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Raise the engine cover (B) torelease from the retainers.

3. Lift and remove the enginecover.

4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall engine cover.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life,careful attention must be paidto engine oil. Following thesesimple, but important steps willhelp protect your investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the RightEngine Oil.”

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil.”

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do WithUsed Oil.”

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accurate reading,the vehicle must be on level ground.The engine oil dipstick handleis a yellow loop. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking your oil level too soonafter engine shut off will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, addone quart/liter of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.See “Selecting the Right Engine Oil”for an explanation of what kind ofoil to use. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e. the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit yourdriving of the vehicle and seek aservice professional to removethe excess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade:

Specification

Use and ask for engine oils withthe dexos™ certification mark.Oils meeting the requirementsof your vehicle should have thedexos™ certification mark on thecontainer. This certification markindicates that the oil has beenapproved to the dexos™specification.

Your vehicle was filled at the factorywith dexos™ approved engine oil.

Notice: Use only engine oilthat is approved to the dexos™specification or an equivalentengine oil of the appropriateviscosity grade. Engine oilsapproved to the dexos™specification will show thedexos™ symbol on the container.Failure to use the recommendedengine oil or equivalent can resultin engine damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. If youare unsure whether your oilis approved to the dexos™specification, ask your serviceprovider.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Use of Substitute Engine Oils ifdexos™ is unavailable: In theevent that dexos™ approved engineoil is not available at an oil changeor for maintaining proper oil level,you may use substitute engine oildisplaying the API Starburst symboland of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.Use of oils that do not meet thedexos™ specification, however,may result in reduced performanceunder certain circumstances.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do notuse other viscosity oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: Inan area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below−29°C (−20°F), an SAE 0W-30oil should be used. An oil of thisviscosity grade will provide easiercold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures.When selecting an oil of theappropriate viscosity grade, besure to always select an oil thatmeets the required specification,dexos™. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos™ specification and displayingthe dexos™ certification markare all that is needed for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-11

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km).

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


10-12 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

If the vehicle does not have DriverInformation Center (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off. The vehiclemust be in P (Park) to accessthis display. Press the tripodometer reset stem until OILLIFE REMAINING displays.

2. Press and hold the trip odometerreset stem until OIL LIFEREMAINING shows “100%.”Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.


If the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message comes back onwhen the vehicle is started, the

engine oil life system hasnot been reset. Repeat theprocedure.

If the vehicle has Driver InformationCenter (DIC) buttons:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFEREMAINING displays.

3. Press and hold the set/resetbutton until “100%” is displayed.Three chimes sound and theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.


If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluidIt is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to thedealer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

Change the fluid at the intervalslisted in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2, and be sure to usethe transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluidmay damage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the automatic transmissionfluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants onpage 11‑6.


Vehicle Care 10-13

The transmission fluid will notreach the end of the dipstick unlessthe transmission is at operatingtemperature. If you need to checkthe transmission fluid level, pleasetake the vehicle to your dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter atthe scheduled maintenanceintervals and replace it at thefirst oil change after each80 000 km (50,000 mile) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.If driving in dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter (awayfrom vehicle) to release loose dustand dirt. If the filter remains cakedwith dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter, do the following:

1. Remove the engine cover. SeeEngine Cover on page 10‑7.

A. Ventilation Tube

B. Sensor

2. Disconnect the cover fitting fromthe ventilation tube (A).

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the sensor (B).

A. Clamp

B. Screws

C. Housing Cover

D. Filter

E. Base

4. Loosen the outlet ductclamp (A).

5. Loosen the six housingcover (C) screws (B).


10-14 Vehicle Care

6. Remove the housing cover (C)with outlet duct.

7. Remove the filter (D) and anyloose debris that may be foundin the base (E).

8. Inspect or replace the filter (D).

9. Reverse Steps 2 through 6 toreinstall the housing coverand reconnect the electricalconnector to the sensor.

10. Reinstall the engine cover.See Engine Cover onpage 10‑7.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air;it helps to stop flames if theengine backfires. Use cautionwhen working on the engine anddo not drive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank

B. Radiator Pressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fans


Vehicle Care 10-15

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant otherthan DEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner, at 50 000 km(30,000miles) or 24months,whichever occurs first. Anyrepairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL (silicate-free)coolant in the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. The coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.


10-16 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The vehicle's coolant warningsystem is set for the propercoolant mixture. With plain wateror the wrong mixture, the enginecould get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning.The engine could catch fire andyou or others could be burned.Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Notice: If extra inhibitorsand/or additives are used inthe vehicle's cooling system,the vehicle could be damaged.Use only the proper mixture ofthe engine coolant listed in thismanual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 formore information.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant recovery tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant recoverytank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the FULL COLD mark, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant recovery tank, but be surethe cooling system is cool beforethis is done. See Cooling System onpage 10‑14 for more information.

The coolant recovery tank cap hasthis symbol on it.

When the engine is cold, the coolantlevel should be at or above theFULL COLD line marked on therecovery tank.

When the engine is hot, thelevel could be higher than theFULL COLD line. If the coolant isbelow the FULL COLD line whenthe engine is hot, there could bea leak in the cooling system.

If the coolant is low, add the coolantor take the vehicle to a dealer forservice.

How to Add Coolant to theRecovery Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture at thecoolant recovery tank.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theRadiator

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquidsfrom a hot cooling system canblow out and burn you badly.They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tank

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

pressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If coolant is needed, add the propermixture directly to the radiator, butbe sure the cooling system is coolbefore this is done.

1. Detach fasteners and liftoff the panel that covers theradiator cap.

2. Remove the radiator pressurecap when the cooling system,including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If you hear a hiss, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left in thesystem.

3. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

4. Fill the radiator to the base ofthe filler neck with the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture.

5. When coolant begins to flow outof the filler neck, reinstall thepressure cap. Be sure to secureit tightly.


Vehicle Care 10-19

6. Fill the coolant recovery tank tothe FULL COLD mark.

7. Reinstall the cap on the coolantrecovery tank but leave theradiator pressure cap off.

8. Start the engine and let it rununtil the upper radiator hosefeels warm. Any time during thisprocedure, watch out for theengine cooling fan(s).

9. If the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck is low, addmore of the proper DEX-COOLcoolant mixture through thefiller neck until the level is backup to the base of the filler neck.Replace the pressure cap.Be sure to secure it tightly.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


10-20 Vehicle Care

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on theinstrument panel cluster.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑14.

The vehicle may also displayan ENGINE OVERHEATEDIDLE ENGINE and ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINEmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Engine CoolingSystem Messages on page 5‑38.

You may decide not to lift the hoodwhen this warning appears, butinstead get service help right away.See Roadside Assistance Program(United States and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

If you do decide to lift the hood,make sure the vehicle is parkedon a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see orhear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badlyburned. Stop the engine if itoverheats, and get out of thevehicle until the engine is cool.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-21

WARNING (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day. Stops after high-speed driving. Idles for long periods in traffic. Tows a trailer

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. If in a traffic jam, shift toN (Neutral), otherwise, shiftto the highest gear whiledriving—D (Drive) or L (Low).

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the car in frontof you. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”next in this section.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modelets the vehicle be driven to a safeplace in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine conditionexists, an overheat protection modewhich alternates firing groups ofcylinders helps prevent enginedamage. In this mode, there isa significant loss in power andengine performance. Thetemperature gauge indicates anoverheat condition exists. Drivingextended distances and/or towinga trailer in the overheat protectionmode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause of

coolant loss, change the oiland reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated under the engine cover onthe passenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessyou suspect there is a leak in thesystem or you hear an unusualnoise. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Remove the engine cover.See Engine Cover on page 10‑7.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should besomewhere between MAX andMIN line on the dipstick in roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow MIN line, you should addfluid close to MAX Line.


Vehicle Care 10-23

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When adding windshieldwasher fluid, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If the vehicle will be operatingin an area where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, use a fluidthat has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

When the windshield washer fluidreservoir is low, a WASHER FLUIDLOW ADD FLUID message will bedisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See Washer FluidMessages on page 5‑45 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice:. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not cleanas well as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold. Thisallows for fluid expansionif freezing occurs, whichcould damage the tank ifit is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


10-24 Vehicle Care

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, havethe vehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings are

installed. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑20.


10-26 Vehicle Care

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash. Alwaysuse the proper brake fluid.

Notice:. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ DANGER

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑84 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel DriveIt is not necessary to check theall–wheel drive lubricant levels.A fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take thevehicle to the dealer as soon aspossible.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑30.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑30.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition to ON/RUN, but donot start the engine. Withoutapplying the regular brake, tryto move the shift lever out ofP (Park) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of P (Park),contact your dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. To replace the wiperblade assembly:

1. Pull the windshield wiper armaway from the windshield.

2. Press the button in the middle ofthe wiper arm connector and pullthe wiper blade away from thearm connector.

3. Install the new wiper blade andmake sure the wiper blade locksinto place.

For the proper size and type seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑8.


10-30 Vehicle Care

Backglass Wiper Blade

To replace the backglass wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass.

The backglass wiper blade willnot lock in a vertical positionso care should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

2. Rotate the wiper bladeassembly, hold the wiper armin position, and push the bladeaway from the wiper arm.

3. Replace the wiper blade.

4. Return the wiper arm and bladeassembly to the rest position onthe glass.

Windshield ReplacementThe windshield is part of theHead-Up Display (HUD) system.If you ever have to get thewindshield replaced, get one thatis designed for HUD or the HUDimage may look out of focus.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if your vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment tothe low-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatyou take the vehicle to your dealerfor service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑31.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ WARNING

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.


Vehicle Care 10-31

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you couldbe seriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

The up‐level vehicle has HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, the beammight be a slightly different shadethan it was originally. This is normal.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the liftgate trim.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp forward through the lift gatetrim opening.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.

5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

License Plate Lamp 194LL

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

High Voltage Devices andWiring

{ WARNING

Exposure to high voltage cancause shock, burns, and evendeath. The high voltage systemsin your vehicle can only beserviced by technicians withspecial training.

High voltage devices areidentified by labels. Do notremove, open, take apart,or modify these devices. Highvoltage cable or wiring hasorange covering. Do not probe,tamper with, cut, or modify highvoltage cable or wiring.

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed.This greatly reduces the chanceof circuit overload and fire causedby electrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectthe following in the vehicle:. Headlamp Wiring. Windshield Wiper Motor. Power Windows and Other

Power Accessories

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can be

borrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Havethe headlamp wiring checked rightaway if the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before usingthe windshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snowor ice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicleare protected from short circuitsby a combination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockThe underhood fuse block is locatedin the engine compartment, on thepassenger side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover for access to thefuse/relay block.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


10-34 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

A/C CLUTCHAir ConditioningClutch

ABS MTRAntilock BrakingSystem (ABS)Motor

Fuses Usage

AFS Adaptive ForwardLighting System

AIRBAG Airbag System

AUX POWER Auxiliary Power

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

AWDAll-Wheel-DriveSystem

BATT 1 Battery 1

BATT 2 Battery 2

BATT 3 Battery 3

CIGARLIGHTER

Cigar Lighter

ECMEngine ControlModule

ECM 1Engine ControlModule 1


Vehicle Care 10-35

Fuses Usage

EMISSION 1 Emission 1

EMISSION 2 Emission 2

EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

FSCMFuel SystemControl Module

HORN Horn

HTD MIRHeated OutsideRearview Mirror

HVAC BLWR

Heating,Ventilation andAir ConditioningBlower

LT HI BEAMLeft High-BeamHeadlamp

LT LO BEAMLeft Low‐BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

LT PRK Left Parking Lamp

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp andTurn Signal

ODD COILS Odd Injector Coils

PCM IGNPowertrain ControlModule Ignition

PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate

PWROUTLET

Power Outlet

REARCAMERA

Rear Camera

RR APORear AccessoryPower Outlet

RR DEFOG Rear Defogger

RR HVACRear ClimateControl System

RT HI BEAMRight High‐BeamHeadlamp

Fuses Usage

RT LO BEAM Right Low‐BeamHeadlamp

RT PRKRightParking Lamp

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp andTurn Signal

RVC SNSRRegulated VoltageControl Sensor

S/ROOF/SUNSHADE

Sunroof

SERVICE Service Repair

SPARE Spare

Stop Lamps(China Only)


STRTR Starter

TCMTransmissionControl Module

TRANS Transmission


10-36 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back‐upLamps

TRLR BRK Trailer Brake

TRLRPRK LAMP

Trailer ParkingLamps

TRLR PWR Trailer Power

WPR/WSWWindshield Wiper/Washer

Relays Usage

A/CCMPRSRCLTCH

Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

AUXVAC PUMP

AuxiliaryVacuum Pump

CRNK Switched Power

FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1

Relays Usage

FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2

FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3

FOG LAMP Fog Lamps

HI BEAMHigh‐BeamHeadlamps

HID/LO BEAM

High IntensityDischarge (HID)Low‐BeamHeadlamps

HORN Horn

IGN Ignition Main

LT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer LeftStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp

PRK LAMP Park Lamp

PWR/TRN Powertrain

RR DEFOGRear WindowDefogger

Relays Usage

RT TRLRSTOP/TRN

Trailer RightStoplamp and TurnSignal Lamp



TRLRBCK/UP

Trailer Back-upLamps

WPR Windshield Wiper

WPR HIWindshield WiperHigh Speed

Instrument Panel FuseBlockThe instrument panel fuse blockis located under the instrumentpanel on the passenger side of thevehicle. Pull down on the cover toaccess the fuse block.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fuse Side

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG Airbag

AMP Amplifier

BCK/UP/STOP

Back‐up Lamp/Stoplamp

BCMBody ControlModule

CNSTR/VENT

Canister Vent

CTSY Courtesy

DR/LCK Door Locks

DRLDaytime RunningLamps

DRL 2

GMC HID Only(if equipped)/Rear FogLamps-China Only

DSPLY Display

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher

HTD/COOL SEAT

Heated/CoolingSeats

Fuses Usage

HVACHeating,Ventilation andAir Conditioning

INADV/PWR/LED

InadvertentPower LED

INFOTMNT Infotainment

LT/TRN/SIGDriver Side TurnSignal

MSMMemory SeatModule

PDMPower Mirrors,Liftgate Release

PWR MODE Power Mode

PWR/MIR Power Mirrors

RDO Radio

REAR WPR Rear Wiper

RT/TRN/SIGPassenger SideTurn Signal

SPARE Spare

STR/WHL/ILLUM

Steering WheelIllumination


10-38 Vehicle Care

Relay Side

Relays Usage

LT/PWR/SEAT

Driver Side PowerSeat Relay

RT/PWR/SEAT

Passenger SidePower Seat Relay

PWR/WNDWPower WindowsRelay

PWR/COLUMN

Power SteeringColumn Relay

L/GATE Liftgate Relay

LCK Power Lock Relay

REAR/WSWRear WindowWasher Relay

Relays Usage

UNLCK Power UnlockRelay

DRL2Daytime RunningLamps 2 Relay

LT/UNLCKDriver Side UnlockRelay

DRLDaytime RunningLamps Relay

SPARE Spare

FRT/WSWFront WindshieldWasher Relay


Vehicle Care 10-39

Wheels and Tires

TiresYour new vehicle comes withhigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.If you ever have questions aboutyour tire warranty and where toobtain service, see your vehicleWarranty booklet for details.For additional information referto the tire manufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading your tirescan cause overheating asa result of too much flexing.You could have a blowout

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and a serious accident.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

. Under inflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenyour tires are cold.

. Over inflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when youhit a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If your tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only yourdealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples below show atypical passenger vehicle tireand a compact spare tiresidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define a

particular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑58.


Vehicle Care 10-41

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 miles) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If your vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑62.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.


10-42 Vehicle Care

(F) Tire Size: A combinationof letters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following illustrationshows an example of a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.


Vehicle Care 10-43

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal).

Accessory Weight: Thismeans the combined weightof optional accessories.Some examples of optionalaccessories are, automatictransmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows,power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in psi (pounds persquare inch) or kPa (kilopascal)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑46.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.


10-44 Vehicle Care

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) motor vehicle safetystandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multipliedby 68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 inch) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑55.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information systemthat provides consumers withratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑58.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle'scapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tellyou that under‐inflation orover‐inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not haveenough air (under‐inflation),you can get the following:. Tire overloading andover-heating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

If your tires have too much air(over‐inflation), you can getthe following:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to your vehicle.This label shows your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures foryour tires when they are cold.The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on thelabel, is the minimum amount of

air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle's maximum loadcarrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightyour vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12.How you load your vehicleaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load yourvehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check your tires once a monthor more. Do not forget to checkthe compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one. The compactspare should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑83.


Vehicle Care 10-47

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply bylooking at them. Radial tires maylook properly inflated even whenthey are under‐inflated. Checkthe tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. Cold meansyour vehicle has been sitting forat least three hours or driven nomore than 1.6 km (1 mile).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.

If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, releaseair by pushing on the metal stemin the center of the tire valve.Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Be sure to put the valve capsback on the valve stems. Theyhelp prevent leaks by keepingout dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)


10-48 Vehicle Care

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under‐inflation

has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑49 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) andIndustry Canada

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑19 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-210/220/310.


Vehicle Care 10-49

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warnthe driver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly, if the vehiclehas one. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in thevehicle's tires and transmits thetire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument panelcluster. If the warning light comeson, stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑12.

At the same time a message tocheck the pressure in a specific tireappears on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. The low tirepressure warning light and the DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed bythe driver. For additional informationand details about the DIC operation

and displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (With DIC Buttons) onpage 5‑25 or Driver InformationCenter (DIC) (Without DIC Buttons)on page 5‑29 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑43.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure in the tire(s) are gettinglow and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel, attached to your vehicle,shows the size of your vehicle'soriginal equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressure for yourvehicle's tires when they are cold.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12, for an example of theTire and Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.Also see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Your vehicle's TPMS can warnyou about a low tire pressurecondition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See TireInspection on page 10‑52, TireRotation on page 10‑53 and Tireson page 10‑39.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS)sensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always useonly the GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑64 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the low tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stayson for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message isalso displayed. The low tire warninglight and DIC warning messagecome on at each ignition cycle untilthe problem is corrected. Some ofthe conditions that can cause themalfunction light and DIC messageto come on are:. One of the road tires has

been replaced with the sparetire, if your vehicle has one.The spare tire does not havea TPMS sensor. The TPMSmalfunction light and DICmessage should go off onceyou re‐install the road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was started but notcompleted or not completedsuccessfully after rotating thevehicle's tires. The DIC messageand TPMS malfunction lightshould go off once the TPMSsensor matching processis performed successfully.See “TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged. TheDIC message and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealerfor service.


Vehicle Care 10-51

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match your vehicle's originalequipment tires or wheels. Tiresand wheels other than thoserecommended for your vehiclecould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑56.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioning itcannot detect or signal a low tirecondition. See your dealer forservice if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. Any time yourotate your vehicle's tires or replaceone or more of the TPMS sensors,the identification codes will need tobe matched to the new tire/wheelposition. The sensors are matchedto the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side reartire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors can also bematched to each tire/wheel positionby increasing or decreasing thetire's air pressure. If increasing thetire's air pressure, do not exceedthe maximum inflation pressureindicated on the tire's sidewall.

To decrease air-pressure out of atire you can use the pointed endof the valve cap, a pencil-style airpressure gauge, or a key.

You have two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than two minutes, to matchthe first tire and wheel, or more thanfive minutes to match all four tireand wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch toON/RUN with the engine off.

3. Press the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter's LOCKand UNLOCK buttons at thesame time for approximatelyfive seconds. The horn soundstwice to signal the receiveris in relearn mode and TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messagedisplays on the DIC screen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.


10-52 Vehicle Care

5. Remove the valve cap fromthe valve cap stem. Activatethe TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire's airpressure for five seconds,or until a horn chirp sounds.The horn chirp, which may takeup to 30 seconds to sound,confirms that the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to this tire and wheelposition.

6. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on thevalve stems.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that youregularly inspect your vehicle'stires, including the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, for signsof wear or damage at least oncea month.

Always remove the tires if anyof the following statementsare true:. You can see the indicators at

three or more places aroundthe tire.

. You can see cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.


Vehicle Care 10-53

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 miles).See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 11‑2.

The purpose of a regular tirerotation is to achieve a uniformwear for all tires on the vehicle.This will ensure that the vehiclecontinues to perform most like itdid when the tires were new.The first rotation is the mostimportant. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 11‑2.

Any time you notice unusualwear, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑55 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑60.

When rotating the vehicle's tires,always use the correct rotationpattern shown here.

If the vehicle has a compactspare tire, do not include it inthe tire rotation.


10-54 Vehicle Care

After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front andrear inflation pressures asshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑46 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑12.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑49.

Make certain that all wheelnuts are properly tightened.See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑62.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Make sure the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and thentry to rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. SeeTire Changing on page 10‑72.


Vehicle Care 10-55

When It Is Time for NewTiresVarious factors, such asmaintenance, temperatures,driving speeds, vehicle loading,and road conditions influence whenyou need new tires.

One way to tell when it is time fornew tires is to check the treadwearindicators, which appear when the

tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) orless of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑52 andTire Rotation on page 10‑53 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This is also true for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnot being used. Multiple conditionsaffect how fast this aging takesplace, including temperatures,loading conditions, and inflationpressure maintenance. Tires willtypically need to be replaced due towear before they may need to bereplaced due to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle.Park a vehicle that will be storedfor at least a month in a cool, dry,clean area away from direct sunlightto slow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended periodcan cause flat spots on the tiresthat may result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Buying New TiresGM has developed andmatched specific tires foryour vehicle. The originalequipment tires installed onyour vehicle, when it wasnew, were designed tomeet General MotorsTire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM stronglyrecommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating.This way, your vehicle willcontinue to have tires that aredesigned to give the sameperformance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, rideand handling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by an MS formud and snow. See TireSidewall Labeling on page 10‑40for additional information.

GM recommends replacing tiresin sets of four. This is becauseuniform tread depth on all tires

will help keep your vehicleperforming most like it didwhen the tires were new.Replacing less than a full setof tires can affect the brakingand handling performance ofyour vehicle. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑52 and Tire Rotationon page 10‑53 for information onproper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. You or otherscould be injured or killed if youattempt to mount or dismounta tire. Only your dealer or anauthorized tire service centershould mount and dismount thetires.


Vehicle Care 10-57

{ WARNING

Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while driving.If you mix tires of differentsizes, brands, or types(radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handleproperly, and you could havea crash. Using tires of differentsizes, brands, or types mayalso cause damage to yourvehicle. Be sure to use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels. It isall right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, asit was developed for use onyour vehicle. See CompactSpare Tire on page 10‑83.

{ WARNING

If you use bias-ply tires onthe vehicle, the wheel rimflanges could develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly, causing a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If you must replace yourvehicle's tires with those that donot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radialand bias‐belted tires) as yourvehicle's original tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tiresare installed on your vehicle.Non‐TPC Spec rated tires maygive a low‐pressure warningthat is higher or lower than theproper warning level you wouldget with TPC Spec rated tires.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑47.

Your vehicle's originalequipment tires are listedon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑12 formore information about the Tireand Loading Information labeland its location on your vehicle.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf you add wheels or tires that area different size than your originalequipment wheels and tires, thiscould affect the way your vehicleperforms, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can be affected.

{ WARNING

If you add different sizedwheels, your vehicle may notprovide an acceptable level ofperformance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheelsare selected. You may increasethe chance that you will crash andsuffer serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for your vehicle, andhave them properly installed bya GM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑56 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.


Vehicle Care 10-59

The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passengercars and light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and ahalf (1½) times as well onthe government course as atire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can causethe material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to alevel of performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The

temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels on the vehiclewere aligned and balanced carefullyat the factory to give the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, if thereis unusual tire wear or the vehiclepulls to one side or the other, thealignment should be checked. If thevehicle vibrates when driving on asmooth road, the tires and wheelsmight need to be rebalanced. Seeyour dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it,except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired.See your dealer if any of theseconditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel you need.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.

If you need to replace any of thewheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts,or Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) sensors, replace them onlywith new GM original equipmentparts. This way, you will be sure tohave the right wheel, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors forthe vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-61

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts on your vehicle can bedangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of yourvehicle, make your tires loseair and make you lose control.You could have a collision inwhich you or others could beinjured. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems withbearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometercalibration, headlamp aim,bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body andchassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑62 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Putting a used wheel on thevehicle is dangerous. You cannotknow how it has been usedor how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and causea crash. If you have to replace awheel, use a new GM originalequipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

Use another type of tractiondevice only if its manufacturerrecommends it for use on thevehicle and tire size combinationand road conditions. Followthat manufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjustor remove the device if it iscontacting the vehicle, and do notspin the vehicle's wheels. If youdo find traction devices that willfit, install them on the front tires.


10-62 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile you are driving, especially ifyou maintain your vehicle's tiresproperly. If air goes out of a tire,it is much more likely to leak outslowly. But if you should ever havea blowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rearblowout remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal. Get the vehicleunder control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It maybe very bumpy and noisy, but youcan still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunder-inflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely under-inflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.


Vehicle Care 10-63

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people.You and they could be badlyinjured or even killed. Find a levelplace to change your tire. To helpprevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission shift lever inP (Park), or shift a manualtransmission to 1 (First) orR (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To be certain the vehicle willnot move, put blocks at the frontand rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed.That would be the tire on theother side, at the opposite endof the vehicle.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a sparetire safely, follow the instructionsbelow. Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑72. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑64.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑24.

{ WARNING

Over-inflating a tire couldcause the tire to rupture andyou or others could be injured.Be sure to read and follow thetire sealant and compressor kitinstructions and inflate the tireto its recommended pressure.Do not exceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehiclecould cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store thetire sealant and compressor kitin its original location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ in) in thetread area of the tire. It can also beused to inflate an under inflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram (United States andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


Vehicle Care 10-65

The kit includes: A. Selector Switch(Sealant/Air or Air Only)

B. On/Off Button

C. Pressure Gauge

D. Pressure Deflation Button(If equipped)

E. Tire Sealant Canister

F. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

G. Air Only Hose (Black)

H. Power Plug

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should be

replaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant toseal one tire. After usage, thesealant canister and sealant/airhose assembly must be replaced.See “Removal and Installation ofthe Sealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit toTemporarily Seal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.


10-66 Vehicle Care

When using the tire sealantand compressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑62 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑71.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.


Vehicle Care 10-67

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)counterclockwise to theSealant + Air position.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (C) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑46.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until thecorrect pressure is reached.

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet and

unscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program (UnitedStates and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

11. Press the on/off button (B)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 12 through18 must be done immediatelyafter Step 11.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.


10-68 Vehicle Care

13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

14. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the sealant/airhose (F), and the powerplug (H) back in their originallocation.

16. If the flat tire was able toinflate to the recommendedinflation pressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (E) and placeit in a highly visible location.The label is a reminder not toexceed 90 km/h (55 mph) untilthe damaged tire is repaired orreplaced.

17. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

18. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 miles) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

19. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure.Refer to Steps 1 through 11under “Using the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.

See Roadside AssistanceProgram (United States andCanada) on page 13‑8 orRoadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

20. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire, and vehicle.

21. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (E) and sealant/airhose (F) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.


Vehicle Care 10-69

22. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

23. After temporarily sealing atire using the tire sealantand compressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin a 100 miles (161 km) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑4.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑62 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑71.

2. Unwrap the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.


10-70 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the tire valve stem capfrom the flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the air only hose (G) ontothe tire valve stem by turning itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (H) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑9.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Turn the selector switch (A)clockwise to the Air Onlyposition.

9. Press the on/off (B) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

10. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (C). The recommendedinflation pressure can befound on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑46.

The pressure gauge (C) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

If you inflate the tire higherthan the recommendedpressure you can adjustthe excess pressure bypressing the pressure deflationbutton (D), if equipped, untilthe proper pressure reading isreached. This option is onlyfunctional when using the aironly hose (G).

11. Press the on/off button (B)to turn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

12. Unplug the power plug (H) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

13. Disconnect the air onlyhose (G) from the tirevalve stem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.


Vehicle Care 10-71

14. Replace the air only hose (G)and the power plug (H) andcord back in its originallocation.

15. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unwrap the sealant hose.

2. Press the canister releasebutton.

3. Pull up and remove the canister.

4. Replace with a new canisterwhich is available from yourdealer.

5. Push the new canister intoplace.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressorkit is located in the storagecompartment on the driver side,at the rear of the vehicle.

1. Press down on the latch tab andpull the cover off to access thestorage compartment.


10-72 Vehicle Care

2. Press the two tabs on the quickrelease buckle to release thetire sealant and compressor kitstrap.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its tray.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing Tools

The tools needed to remove thespare tire are located in the storagecompartment on the driver side, atthe rear of the vehicle.

1. Open the jack storagecompartment by pulling onthe latch tab, located towardthe rear of the vehicle, andpulling the cover off.

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

2. Remove the wing bolt (B) byturning it counterclockwise.

3. Push the jack (C) up out of theholding bracket and remove thetool bag (A).

4. Turn the jack on its side, with thebottom facing toward you.

5. Pull the jack straight out, bottomfirst.

The tools you will be using includethe jack (A) and lug wrench (B).


Vehicle Care 10-73

Removing the Spare Tire

The compact spare tire is locatedunder the vehicle, in front of the rearbumper. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑83 for more informationabout the compact spare.

A. Rear Convenience Center

B. Lug Wrench

C. Storage Compartment Cap

D. Hoist Shaft

E. Compact Spare Tire

F. Retainer

1. Open the storage compartmentdoor of the conveniencecenter (A) that is nearest theliftgate and remove the cap (C)on the bottom of the storagecompartment.

2. Open the carpet cutout that islocated through the hole of thestorage compartment (C).

3. Attach the lug wrench (B) intothe hoist shaft (D).

4. Turn the lug wrench (B)counterclockwise to lower thespare tire (E) to the ground.Continue turning the wrenchuntil the spare tire can be pulledout from under the vehicle.

5. Tilt the retainer (F) and slip itthrough the wheel opening toremove the spare tire (E) fromthe cable.


10-74 Vehicle Care

6. Turn the wrench (B) clockwiseto raise the cable back up afterremoving the spare tire.

Do not store a full‐size or aflat road tire under the vehicle.See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools” later in this section.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” later in thissection.

If the spare tire will not lower, thesecondary latch could be engaged.

Do the following to check the cable:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable is visible.

2. If it is not visible, see SecondaryLatch System on page 10‑82.

If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the lugwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot over‐tighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. If the spare tire has not lowered,tighten the cable all the way andthen loosen it at least two times.

If the spare tire did lower to theground, continue with Step 5under “Removing the SpareTire (Vehicles with the RearConvenience Center)” listedpreviously.

5. If you still cannot lower thespare tire to the ground, seeSecondary Latch System onpage 10‑82.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑62 for moreinformation.

2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover,loosen the plastic nut caps withthe wheel wrench. They will notcome off. Then, using the flatend of the wheel wrench, pryalong the edge of the coveruntil it comes off. Be careful; theedges may be sharp. Do not tryto remove the cover with yourbare hands.

Store the wheel cover securelyin the rear of the vehicle untilyou have the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

If the vehicle has aluminumwheels, remove the wheel nutcaps using the wheel wrench.

3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but donot remove them — using thelug wrench. For wheels with awheel lock key, use the wheellock key between the lock nutand lug wrench. The key issupplied in the front passengerdoor pocket.

Notice: If this vehicle has wheellocks and an impact wrench isused to remove the wheel nuts,the lock nut or wheel lock keycould be damaged. Do not usean impact wrench to remove thewheel nuts if this vehicle haswheel locks.

4. To identify the appropriatejacking location, find thetriangle (A) about 12 inches(30.5 cm) from the front tireor (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)from the rear tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

The triangle is located near eachwheel on the vehicle's exterior.

Notice: If a jack is used to raisethe vehicle without positioning itcorrectly, the vehicle could bedamaged. When raising thevehicle on a jack, avoid contactwith the rear axle control arms.

5. Attach the lug wrench to thejack, and turn the wrenchclockwise to raise the jackhead 3 inches (7.6 cm).

6. Do not raise the vehicle yet.Put the compact spare tirenear you.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising your vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning thelug wrench clockwise in the jack.Raise the vehicle far enoughoff the ground so that there isenough room for the spare tireto fit under the wheel well.

8. Remove all the wheel nuts andthe flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-77

9. Remove the plastic spare tireheat shield by pulling the rubberlatch. Store the plastic spare tireheat shield. See “Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools” later inthis section for more information.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sureto use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rustor dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flaton page 10‑62.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

10. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

11. Place the spare tire on thewheel mounting surface.

12. Put the nuts on by hand byturning them clockwise untilthe wheel is held against themounting surface. Make surethe rounded end is toward thewheel.


10-78 Vehicle Care

13. Lower the vehicle byattaching the lug wrenchto the jack and turning thewrench counterclockwise.Lower the jack completely.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,

evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence, asshown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton your vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing the Spare Tire

{ WARNING

The underbody-mounted sparetire needs to be stored with thevalve stem pointing down. If thespare tire is stored with the valvestem pointing upwards, thesecondary latch will not workproperly and the spare tire couldloosen and suddenly fall from thevehicle. If this happened whenthe vehicle was being driven,the tire might contact a person oranother vehicle, causing injuryand damage to itself. Be surethe underbody-mounted sparetire is stored with the valve stempointing down.


Vehicle Care 10-79

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the spare tire:

1. Lay the compact spare tire nearthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem down.

2. Reinstall the plastic spare tireheat shield on the compactspare tire.

3. Slide the cable retainer throughthe center of the wheel and startto raise the compact spare tire.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

4. When the compact spare tire isalmost in the stored position,turn the tire so the valve istoward the rear of the vehicle.

This position helps whenchecking the air pressurein the compact spare tire.

5. Raise the tire fully againstthe underside of the vehicle.Continue turning the lug wrenchuntil you feel more than twoclicks. This indicates that thecompact spare tire is secure andthe cable is tight. The spare tirehoist cannot be overtightened.

6. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the lug wrench totighten the cable.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Storing the Flat Tire

1. Remove the cable package fromthe jack storage area.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (E), the center of thewheel (D), and the plastic sparetire heat shield (C), as shown.

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other sideof the vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.


Vehicle Care 10-81

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

Storing the Tools

A. Tool Bag

B. Wing Bolt

C. Jack

Put back all tools as they werestored in the jack storagecompartment and put thecompartment cover back on.

1. Ensure that the bottom of thejack is facing toward you.

2. Turn the jack (C) on its sideand place down on the holdingbracket.

3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) byturning clockwise.

4. To replace the cover, line up thetab at the front of the cover withthe notch in the cover opening.Push the cover in place andmake sure that the rear clips arein the slots and push the coverclosed.

Store the center cap or the plasticbolt‐on wheel covers until a full sizetire is put back on the vehicle. Whenyou replace the compact spare witha full‐size tire, reinstall the bolt‐onwheel covers or the center cap.Hand‐tighten them over the wheelnuts, using the lug wrench.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has an underbodymounted tire hoist assembly thathas a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the compactspare tire from suddenly falling offthe vehicle if the cable holding thespare tire is damaged. For thesecondary latch to work, the tiremust be stowed with the valve stempointing down. See Tire Changingon page 10‑72 for instructions onstoring the spare tire correctly.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failureto read and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

1. If the cable is not visible, startthis procedure at Step 3.

All‐Wheel‐Drive Vehicle shown

2. Turn the lug wrenchcounterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm)of cable is exposed.

3. Attach the lug wrench to thejack and raise the jack at least10 turns.

4. Place the jack under the vehicle,ahead of the rear bumper.Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-83

5. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the jack until it lifts thesecondary latch spring.

6. Keep raising the jack until thespare tire stops moving upwardand is held firmly in place. Thislets you know that the secondarylatch has released and the sparetire is balancing on the jack.

7. Lower the jack by turning the lugwrench counterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until the sparetire slides off the jack.

8. Disconnect the lug wrenchfrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare tirewhile firmly pulling the jack outfrom under the spare tire withthe other hand.

9. Tilt the retainer and slip itthrough the wheel openingwhen the spare tire has beencompletely lowered.

10. Turn the lug wrench clockwiseto raise the cable back up if thecable is hanging.

Have the hoist shaft assemblyinspected as soon as you can.You will not be able to store a sparetire using the hoist assembly until ithas been repaired or replaced.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a timecould result in loss of brakingand handling. This could leadto a crash and you or otherscould be injured. Use only onecompact spare tire at a time.

The compact spare tire, if thevehicle has one, was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, however,it can lose air after a time. Checkthe inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).


10-84 Vehicle Care

After installing the compactspare on the vehicle, stop assoon as possible and make surethe spare tire is correctly inflated.The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to 65 mph(105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-sizetire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is bestto replace the spare with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. The sparetire will last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

And do not mix the compact sparetire or wheel with other wheels ortires. They will not fit. Keep thespare tire and its wheel together.

The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) systemwill be automatically disabledwhen you use the compact spare.To restore the AWD and preventexcessive wear on the clutch in yourAWD, replace the compact sparetire with a full-size tire as soon aspossible.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑26.

If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12‐volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle'ssystem is not a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Onlyuse vehicles with 12-volt systemswith negative grounds to jumpstart your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If theyare, it could cause a groundconnection you do not want.

You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the badgrounding could damage theelectrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission inNeutral before setting theparking brake. If one of thevehicles is a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in Neutral.

Notice: If you leave the radio orother accessories on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessorieswhen jump starting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radioand all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparksand help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on the othervehicle. Your vehicle has aremote positive (+) and aremote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more informationon the terminal locations.


10-86 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the batteries haveenough water. You do not needto add water to the ACDelco®

battery (or batteries) installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cablesdo not have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.


Vehicle Care 10-87

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the dead battery.

Use a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part,or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable at least18 inches (45 cm) away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

The electrical connection is justas good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

Your vehicle has a remotenegative (−) terminal for thispurpose.


10-88 Vehicle Care

10. Now start the vehicle withthe good battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle thathad the dead battery. If it willnot start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle shouldbe towed with all four wheelsoff the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that havelow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(United States and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towingmeans towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle – such as behinda motorhome. The two mostcommon types of recreationalvehicle towing are known as dinghytowing and dolly towing. Dinghytowing is towing the vehicle withall four wheels on the ground.Dolly towing is towing the vehiclewith two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device knownas a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Dinghy Towing

If the vehicle is front-wheel‐drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles may also be towedby putting the front wheels on adolly. See “Dolly Towing” later inthis section.

If the vehicle is all‐wheel‐drive, itcan be dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of theground. These vehicles cannot betowed using a dolly.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components. Re-installthe fuse to start the vehicle.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle to betowed, shift the transmission toP (Park), and turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF.

2. Secure the vehicle to the towingvehicle.


4. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove the 50 ampBATT1 fuse from the underhoodfuse block and store in asafe location. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑33.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If the vehicle istowed without performingeach of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph)is exceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Once the destination is reached:


2. Reinstall the 50 amp BATT1 fuseto the underhood fuse block.

3. Shift the transmission toP (Park), turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF and remove thekey from the ignition.

4. Disconnect the vehicle from thetowing vehicle.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels onthe ground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towingwith two different tire sizes onthe front of the vehicle cancause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles must notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐DriveVehicles Only)

To tow a front-wheel‐drive vehiclefrom the front with two wheels onthe ground:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).



10-92 Vehicle Care

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Do not tow the vehicle from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under “Washingthe Vehicle” later in this section.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from yourdealer.


Vehicle Care 10-93

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces.Wash the vehicle as soon aspossible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that aremarked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces aresubject to aging, weather, andchemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To keepthe paint finish looking new, keepthe vehicle garaged or coveredwhenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Bright metal parts should becleaned regularly to keep theirluster. Wash with water or usechrome polish on chrome orstainless steel trim, if necessary.

Use special care with aluminumtrim. To avoid damaging protectivetrim, never use auto or chromepolish, steam, or caustic soapto clean aluminum. A coating ofwax, rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,keep it clean by washing it often.

Do not wash the vehicle indirect sunlight and use a carwashing soap.

Notice: Certain cleaners containchemicals that can damage theemblems or nameplates on thevehicle. Check the cleaningproduct label. If it states that itshould not be used on plasticparts, do not use it on the vehicleor damage may occur and itwould not be covered by thewarranty.

Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based or thatcontain acid or abrasives, as theycan damage the paint, metal,or plastic on the vehicle. Approvedcleaning products can be obtainedfrom your dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessary


10-94 Vehicle Care

safety precautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

High pressure car washes couldcause water to enter the vehicle.Avoid using high pressure washescloser than 30 cm (12 in) to thesurface of the vehicle. Use of powerwashers exceeding 8,274 kPa(1,200 psi) can result in damageor removal of paint and decals.

Notice: Conveyor systems onsome automatic car washes coulddamage the vehicle. There maynot be enough clearance for theundercarriage. Check with the carwash manager before using theautomatic car wash.

Weatherstrips

Silicone grease on weatherstrips willmake them last longer, seal better,and not stick or squeak. Applysilicone grease with a clean cloth.During very cold, damp weatherfrequent application may berequired. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑6.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

The vehicle may have eitheraluminum or chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels andother chrome trim may bedamaged if the vehicle is notwashed after driving on roadsthat have been sprayed withmagnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides areused on roads for conditionssuch as ice and dust. Alwayswash the vehicle's chrome withsoap and water after exposure.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Notice: Using strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels, coulddamage the surface of thewheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use only approvedcleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels issimilar to the painted surface of thevehicle. Do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,abrasive cleaners, cleaners withacid, or abrasive cleaning brusheson them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chromepolish on aluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish onaluminum wheels could damagethe wheels. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Use chrome polishon chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only onchrome-plated wheels, but avoidany painted surface of the wheel,and buff off immediately afterapplication.

Notice: Driving the vehiclethrough an automatic car washthat has silicone carbide tirecleaning brushes, could damagethe aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Never drive a vehicle that hasaluminum or chrome-platedwheels through an automaticcar wash that uses siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using alint‐free cloth or paper towel soakedwith windshield washer fluid or amild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap,and a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking. Replace the wiper bladesif they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:. Extreme dusty conditions. Sand and salt. Heat and sun. Snow and ice, without proper

removal


10-96 Vehicle Care

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Any stone chips, fractures, or deepscratches in the finish should berepaired right away. Bare metal willcorrode quickly and may developinto major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can berepaired with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer. Largerareas of finish damage can becorrected in your dealer's bodyand paint shop.

Underbody Maintenance

Chemicals used for ice and snowremoval and dust control can collecton the underbody. If these are notremoved, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody partssuch as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush thesematerials from the underbodywith plain water. Clean any areaswhere mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of theframe should be loosened beforebeing flushed. Your dealer or anunderbody car washing systemcan do this.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create a chemicalfallout. Airborne pollutants can fallupon and attack painted surfaces onthe vehicle. This damage can taketwo forms: blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.


Vehicle Care 10-97

Interior CareThe vehicle's interior will continueto look its best if it is cleaned often.Dust and dirt can accumulate onthe upholstery and cause damageto the carpet, fabric, leather, andplastic surfaces. Stains should beremoved quickly as extreme heatcould cause them to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors mayrequire more frequent cleaning.Newspapers and garments that cantransfer color to home furnishingscan also transfer color to thevehicle's interior.

Remove dust from small buttonsand knobs with a small brush withsoft bristles.

Your dealer has products forcleaning the vehicle's interior.When cleaning the vehicle's interior,only use cleaners specificallydesigned for the surfaces that arebeing cleaned. Permanent damagecan result from using cleaners onsurfaces for which they were notintended. Apply the cleaner directly

to the cleaning cloth to preventover-spray. Remove any accidentalover-spray from other surfacesimmediately.

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfaces onthe vehicle, could scratch theglass and/or cause damage tothe rear window defogger. Whencleaning the glass on the vehicle,use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Cleaners can contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in thevehicle's interior. Before usingcleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label.While cleaning the vehicle's interior,maintain adequate ventilation byopening the vehicle's doors andwindows.

Do not clean the interior using thefollowing cleaners or techniques:. Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a stiff brush. It cancause damage to the vehicle'sinterior surfaces.

. Never apply heavy pressure orrub aggressively with a cleaningcloth. Use of heavy pressure candamage the interior and doesnot improve the effectiveness ofsoil removal.

. Use only mild, neutral-pHsoaps. Avoid laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too muchsoap will leave a residue thatleaves streaks and attractsdirt. For liquid cleaners, about20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) ofwater is a good guide.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery while cleaning.

. Damage to the vehicle's interiormay result from the use of manyorganic solvents such as naptha,alcohol, etc.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet

Use a vacuum cleaner with a softbrush attachment to remove dustand loose dirt. A canister vacuumwith a beater bar in the nozzlemay only be used on floor carpetand carpeted floor mats. For soils,always try to remove them first withplain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much ofthe soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a papertowel. Allow the soil to absorbinto the paper towel until nomore can be removed.

. For solid dry soils: remove asmuch as possible and thenvacuum.

To clean:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean whitecloth with water or club soda.

2. Remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Continue cleaning, usinga clean area of the cloth eachtime it becomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub thesoiled area.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution and repeat the cleaningprocess with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, acommercial fabric cleaner or spotlifter may be necessary. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If the locallycleaned area gives any impressionthat a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

A paper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture from the fabric orcarpet after the cleaning process.

Leather

Leather, and lighter colored leatherin particular, will need more frequentcleaning to prevent the buildup ofdust, dirt, and colors transferredfrom other items so that these donot become permanent stains.

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can be used.If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution can beused. Your dealer has a GMapproved leather cleaner availablethat provides superior cleaningperformance when used regularlyon finished automotive leathers.Allow the leather to dry naturally.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Do not use heat, steam, spot liftersor spot removers, or shoe polish onleather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that aresold to preserve and protect leathermay permanently change theappearance and feel of the leatherand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

To remove dust, a soft clothdampened with water can beused. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a clean soft clothdampened with a mild soap solutioncan be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters orremovers on plastic surfaces.Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserveand protect soft plastic surfacesmay permanently change theappearance and feel of the interiorand are not recommended. Do notuse silicone or wax-based products,or those containing organic solventsto clean the vehicle's interiorbecause they can alter theappearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products mayincrease gloss on the instrumentpanel. The increase in gloss maycause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficultto see through the windshield undercertain conditions.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.


10-100 Vehicle Care

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedal.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Button Retainer

Floor mats with a button-typeretainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Pull up on the rear of the mat tounlock and remove.

2. Reinstall the floor mat by liningup the floor mat openings overthe carpet retainers and snapinto position.


Vehicle Care 10-101

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedals.

Knob Retainer

Floor mats with a knob retainer.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

1. Turn the knob until it is alignedwith the slot in the floor matgrommet.

2. Pull up on the floor mat.

3. Center the slot in the floor matgrommet with the knob on thefloor and set into position.

4. Turn the knob until it isperpendicular to the slot in thegrommet to lock the mat inplace.

5. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with theaccelerator or brake pedals.


10-102 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Scheduled MaintenanceScheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9

General InformationNotice: Maintenanceintervals, checks, inspections,recommended fluids, andlubricants are necessary tokeep this vehicle in goodworking condition. Damagecaused by failure to followscheduled maintenance mightnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

As the vehicle owner, you areresponsible for the scheduledmaintenance in this section.We recommend having yourdealer perform these services.Proper vehicle maintenance helpsto keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions forbetter air quality.

Because of all the different wayspeople use vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. The vehicle might needmore frequent checks and services.Please read the information underScheduled Maintenance. To keepthe vehicle in good condition, seeyour dealer.

The maintenance schedule is forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑12.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑43.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous. Some jobs cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if youhave the required know-how andthe proper tools and equipment.If in doubt, see your dealer tohave a qualified technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

At your dealer, you can becertain that you will receive thehighest level of service available.Your dealer has specially trainedservice technicians, uses genuine

replacement parts, as well as,up‐to‐date tools and equipmentto ensure fast and accuratediagnostics.

The proper replacement parts,fluids, and lubricants to use arelisted in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 andMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑8. We recommend the useof genuine parts from your dealer.

Rotation of New Tires

To maintain ride, handling, andperformance of the vehicle, it isimportant that the first rotationservice for new tires be performed.Tires should be rotated every12 000 km/7,500 miles. See TireRotation on page 10‑53.

ScheduledMaintenanceWhen the Change Engine OilSoon Message Displays

Change engine oil and filter.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.An Emission Control Service.

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, service isrequired for the vehicle as soon aspossible, within the next 1 000 km/600 miles. If driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life systemmight not indicate the need forvehicle service for more than a year.The engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year andthe oil life system must be reset.Your dealer has trained servicetechnicians who will performthis work and reset the system.



If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 miles sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11.

Every Engine Oil Change. Change engine oil and

filter. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10‑8and Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑11. An Emission ControlService.

. Engine coolant level check.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑15.

. Engine cooling systeminspection. Visual inspectionof hoses, pipes, fittings, andclamps and replacement,if needed.

. Windshield washer fluid levelcheck. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

. Windshield wiper bladeinspection for wear, cracking,or contamination and windshieldand wiper blade cleaning,if contaminated. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑92. Wornor damaged wiper bladereplacement. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.

. Tire inflation pressurescheck. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑46.

. Tire wear inspection. See TireInspection on page 10‑52.

. Rotate tires if necessary.See Tire Rotation onpage 10‑53.

. Fluids visual leak check(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first). A leak in anysystem must be repaired andthe fluid level checked.

. Engine air cleaner filterinspection. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.

. Brake system inspection(or every 12 months, whicheveroccurs first).

. Steering and suspensioninspection. Visual inspectionfor damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear.

. Body hinges and latches,key lock cylinders, hood latchassemblies, secondary latches,pivots, spring anchor andrelease pawl, hood and doorhinges, rear folding seats,and liftgate hinges lubrication.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6.More frequent lubrication maybe required when the vehicleis exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying siliconegrease on weatherstrips witha clean cloth makes them lastlonger, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

. Restraint system componentcheck. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑31.



. Fuel system inspection fordamage or leaks.

. Exhaust system and nearby heatshields inspection for loose ordamaged components.

Additional Required Services

Every 12 000 km/7,500Miles. Rotate tires. Tires should

be rotated every 12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire Rotationon page 10‑53.

At Each Fuel Stop. Engine oil level check.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑8.. Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.. Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Once a Month. Tire inflation check. See Tire

Pressure on page 10‑46.. Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 10‑52.. Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped.See Sunroof on page 2‑22.

Once a Year. See Starter Switch Check on

page 10‑27.. See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. See Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check onpage 10‑28.

. Accelerator pedal check fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. If the vehicle has a Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit, checkthe sealant expiration dateprinted on the instruction labelof the kit. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑64.

. Underbody flushing service.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 80 000 km/50,000Miles. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 10‑13.

. Automatic transmission fluidchange (severe service)for vehicles mainly drivenin heavy city traffic in hotweather, in hilly or mountainousterrain, when frequently towinga trailer, or used for taxi,police, or delivery service.See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.



. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (severeservice) for vehicles mainlydriven when frequently towing atrailer, or used for taxi, police,or delivery service. During anymaintenance, if a power washeris used to clean mud and dirtfrom the underbody, care shouldbe taken to not directly spraythe transfer case output seals.High pressure water canovercome the seals andcontaminate the transfer casefluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

. Evaporative control systeminspection. Check all fuel andvapor lines and hoses for properhook‐up, routing, and condition.Check that the purge valve,if the vehicle has one, worksproperly. Replace as needed.An Emission Control Service.The U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air ResourcesBoard has determined thatthe failure to perform thismaintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty orlimit recall liability prior to thecompletion of the vehicle'suseful life. We, however,urge that all recommendedmaintenance services beperformed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 160 000 km/100,000Miles. Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service).See Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑12.

. Spark plug replacement andspark plug wires inspection.An Emission Control Service.

. All‐wheel drive only: Transfercase fluid change (normalservice). During any

maintenance, if a powerwasher is used to clean mudand dirt from the underbody,care should be taken to notdirectly spray the transfer caseoutput seals. High pressurewater can overcome the sealsand contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluidwill decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

First Engine Oil Change AfterEvery 240 000 km/150,000Miles. Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every fiveyears, whichever occurs first).See Cooling System onpage 10‑14. An EmissionControl Service.

. Engine drive belts inspectionfor fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage (or every10 years, whichever occursfirst). Replace, if needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos™ specification. Oilsmeeting this specification can be identified with the dexos™ certificationmark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos™certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑8.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑15.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering SystemGM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Carrier Assembly — Differential(Rear Drive Module) and Transfer

Case (Power Transfer Unit)

SAE 75W‐90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,in Canada 89021678).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door Hinges and RearFolding Seat

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, in Canada 10953518)or Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15278634 A3083C

Engine Oil Filter 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20958479 CF179C

Spark Plugs 12611882 41-107

Wiper Blades

Front Driver – 62.5 cm (24.6 in) 15254805 —

Front Passenger – 53.0 cm (20.8 in) 15254804 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.6 in) 15276259 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



Maintenance Record (cont'd)

Date OdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Model designation. Paint information. Production options and special

equipment

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑6 for more information.

Application

Capacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 10.8 L 11.4 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.2 L 5.5 qt

Fuel Tank 83.3 L 22.0 gal

Transmission Fluid* (Drain and Refill) 5.0 L 5.3 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑12 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

3.6L V6 Engine D Automatic 1.10 mm (0.043 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.6L V6 Engine


12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (United Statesand Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(United States andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Assistance Program(United States andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-12Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-17OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-18Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (United Statesand Canada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by the dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss yourconcern with a member ofdealership management. Normally,concerns can be quickly resolvedat that level. If the matter hasalready been reviewed with thesales, service, or parts manager,contact the owner of the dealershipor the general manager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782, CustomerAssistance prompt. In Canada,call General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to giveyour inquiry prompt attention.Have the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance representative:. Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN). This is available fromthe vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith your new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two,you can file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout of court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree withthe decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available inall 50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, orcall the General Motors CustomerCommunication Centre,1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer CommunicationCentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

Your inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with your newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage ofyour vehicle must be handledby your dealer sales or servicedepartments. However, werecognize that despite the goodintentions of all parties involved,sometimes a misunderstandingmay occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

Step One

Explain your case to the dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. Theyare interested in your continualsatisfaction.

Step Two

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or thedealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

Step Three

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address



See Customer Assistance Offices(United States) on page 13‑5 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Customer AssistanceOffices (United Statesand Canada)GMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1‐800‐GMC‐8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-462-8782

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

Front U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].



Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0812

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0812

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8191

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.) —www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more. Store online service and

maintenance records. GMC dealer locator for service

nationwide. Exclusive privileges and offers. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries



Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada(Canada) — www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for your vehicle, suchas hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935.Text Telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.



Roadside AssistanceProgram (United Statesand Canada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐462‐8782; (TextTelephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with themost direct route or the mostscenic route. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: If yourtrip is interrupted due to awarranty failure, incidentalexpenses may be reimbursedduring the 5 years/(160 000 km)100,000 miles Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel, meals,and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from whereyour trip was started toqualify. General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copyof the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor maygive permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.



Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.

For detailed information aboutRoadside Assistance, pleasesee the brochure provided withyour new vehicle or visit ourwebsite at: www.gmc.com.mx.Navigate the site and click on“Asistencia en el Camino.” E-mailcorrespondence should be sentto: [email protected].

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0801

United States

1-866-466-8902

Canada

1-800-268-6800

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen your vehicle requireswarranty service, contactyour dealer and request anappointment. By schedulinga service appointment andadvising your service consultantof your transportation needs,your dealer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for thesame day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper to Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing your inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.



Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize yourinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of the dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If your vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof the dealer's shuttle service,the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange toprovide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse youfor a rental vehicle that you obtainif your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited andmust be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that yousign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion ofthe repair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.



Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved ina collision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired bya qualified technician using theproper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish yourvehicle's resale value, and safetyperformance can be compromisedin subsequent collisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are your best choiceto ensure that your vehicle'sdesigned appearance, durability,

and safety are preserved. The useof Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipmentparts may also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total lossesin prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain your vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by your GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.



Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are madeby companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for yourvehicle. As a result, these partsmay fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems,and may not perform properly insubsequent collisions. Aftermarketparts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty,and any vehicle failure related tosuch parts is not covered by thatwarranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your Vehicle

Protect your investment in your GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to your GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure thatyour vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs with

Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(United States and Canada) onpage 13‑8 or Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) on page 13‑10.



Gather the following information:. Driver's name, address, and

telephone number. Driver's license number. Owner's name, address, and

telephone number. Vehicle license plate number. Vehicle make, model, and

model year. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Insurance company and policy

number. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See After an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑39.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that your vehiclerequires damage repairs, GMrecommends that you take anactive role in its repair. If you havea pre-determined repair facility ofchoice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specifyto the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may

initially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if your vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of your vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: Alllisted prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Canadian residents are tomake checks payable in U.S. funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that your vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call them at 1-800-333-0510 orwrite to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If your vehicle is equipped withan active OnStar system, thatsystem may also record data incrash or near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit,at www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), orby pressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation system operating manualfor information on stored data andfor deletion instructions.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting,and in-vehicle transmitters forgarage door openers. RFIDtechnology in GM vehicles does notuse or record personal informationor link with any other GM systemcontaining personal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeinterference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to anyof these systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-46

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

What Will You See Afteran Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-39

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-35

AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Alarm SystemAnti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-28AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7AntennaMulti-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-TheftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-42

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Controller,Rear (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24, 7-30

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-47Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-17Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Management System . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CDDVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-56

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63, 3-65Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-53Where to Put the Restraint . . .3-55

Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-92Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Dual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cluster, IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-12Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6


INDEX i-3

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Engine TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

CoversCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-15

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-12Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-17Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Delayed Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37DisplaysHead-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-28

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25, 5-29

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


i-4 INDEX

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-38

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Engine (cont.)Coolant TemperatureWarning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Cooling System Messages . . .5-38Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-17Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

FilterEngine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Flat Tire, Changing . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-100FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Front Fog LampsLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24


INDEX i-5

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated and Ventilated . . . . . . . .3-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-44Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-43Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Requirements, California . . . . .9-43System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Fuel EconomyDriving for Better . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-53Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Head-Up Display (HUD) . . . . . . . 5-32HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18High Voltage Devices andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32


i-6 INDEX

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii, 7-1

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-40Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-40Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-18Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25LATCH SystemReplacing Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-63

Latch, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

LightingDelayed Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Delayed Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Parade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Engine CoolantTemperature Warning . . . . . . .5-22


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-23Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24StabiliTrak® Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-22Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSYSTEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-18Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-42Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-38Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-40

Messages (cont.)Object Detection System . . . . .5-41Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-41Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24, 7-30Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13


i-8 INDEX

NNavigation SystemVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-48Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20

PParade Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7ParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-41

Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-49

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-19Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-19

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-10

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3


INDEX i-9

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-19Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Rear AudioController (RAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Rear Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10, 8-11

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-47

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-38Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-6Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6

Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-47Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts After aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-41

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-32Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-30


i-10 INDEX

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-16General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-10Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and VentilatedFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-82Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63, 3-65

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-10Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . 3-45

Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13StabiliTrak® Indicator Light . . . . 5-22StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Cargo Management System . . . 4-3Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


INDEX i-11

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemRoof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Tires (cont.)If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-49Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-43Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-47Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

Secondary Latch System . . . 10-82Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-60When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-22TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-48Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-47Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-89Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4


i-12 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-36Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-53Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53

Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-45Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-71

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Voltage Devices, andWiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

WWarning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . . . 5-45

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Where to Put the ChildRestraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Wiring, High VoltageDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia … · GMC...

Documents

Transcript of GMC Acadia/Acadia Denali Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1) 2011 GMC Acadia/Acadia … · GMC...